Retail Scale Bc Ii Basic Class Ii

Transcript

Retail scale BC II Basic Class II Operating instructions from program version 3.00 6.111.98.5.01.18 en Alle Rechte vorbehalten All rights reserved Tous droits réservés Reservados todos los derechos Tutti i diritti riservati © 04 / 2013 Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG, 72336 Balingen Postfach 10 01 64 72301 Balingen/Germany, Tel. (+49 7433) 12-0, Fax (+49 7433) 12-2696 e-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.bizerba.com Translation of original operating instructions 6.111.98.5.01.18 Chapter index About these instructions About the device 1 2 Installation 3 4 Device and operating controls 5 Operation 6 Programming 7 Troubleshooting 8 Maintenance 9 Technical data 10 Subject index 11 Safety instructions 6.111.98.5.01.18 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II List of contents List of contents 1 2 3 4 Page About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 1.1 Safe-keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 1.3 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 1.4 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 2.1 Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 2.2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 2.3 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 2.4 Designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 2.5 Verification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 2.6 Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 2.7 2.7.1 Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5 6 2.8 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 3.1 Requirements on the operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 3.2 Device signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 3.3 Sources of risk related to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 4.1 Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 Installation and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conditions for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assemble the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check the electric connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of customer's power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of scale network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rechargeable battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation with rechargeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery icon display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 4.2.5 4.2.6 6.111.98.5.01.18 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 - 0-1 List of contents Operating instruction BC II Page 5 4.3 4.3.1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Switch on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 8 4.4 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8 Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 5.1 Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 5.2 5.2.1 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Membrane keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 5 5 - 3 3 4 4 7 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the thermal print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ticket roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert new ticket roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 - 10 - 11 - 11 - 12 5.4.4 6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 6.1 Switching on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 6.2 Switch off device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 6.3 Zerosetting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Self-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price labeling with manual triggering * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price labeling with automatic start * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piece price multi- label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed weight label multi-printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 6.5 6.5.1 Unit price input via 10-key keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . 6 - 10 6.6 Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12 6.7 Scroll function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13 6.8 Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 6.9 Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 6.10 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14 0-2 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 - 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II List of contents Page 6.11 6.11.1 6.11.2 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . Calling up PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator sales with PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ”Overwrite” PLU unit price”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces Register manual weight input ( depending on country) . . . . . . . . . 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 - 15 15 17 17 17 17 18 6.12 6.12.1 Tare functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare balancing for unknown tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unknown tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Batch tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare balancing for known tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save tare value weighed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save tare value entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call up operator tare saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 - 19 19 19 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 23 24 6.12.2 6.12.3 7 6.13 Assisted sales with ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25 6.14 Talon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26 6.15 Print ticket upon request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26 6.16 Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27 6.17 6.17.1 6.17.2 6.17.3 Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the last ticket via the operator key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open the ticket via ticket number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overwrite VAT from PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Serviced selling with label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30 6.19 By Count article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 31 6.20 Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 36 6.21 By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40 6.22 Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45 6.23 6.23.1 6.23.2 Product with data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46 Sale with manual input of the traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46 Sale with fixed traceability number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 47 6 6 6 6 - 27 28 28 29 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 7.1 Initial display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 7.2 Menu password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 7.3 Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.18 0-3 List of contents Operating instruction BC II Page General programming sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2 7.4 Initial scale setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.8 7.5.9 Overview of list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU direct keys .................................. Barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLD labels ........................................ Logos ............................................... VAT rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 9 7.6 General procedure for text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10 7.7 Overview of scrolling messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15 7.8 Barcode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturer code EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instore code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instore code EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32 7.10 Overview of By Count article definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33 Create By Count piece goods in a PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34 7.11 Create overview of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35 7.12 Overview of By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36 7.13 7.13.1 Overview VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 37 Assign VAT to PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38 7.14 Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) . . . 7 - 39 0-4 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - - 16 18 19 20 25 26 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II List of contents Page 7.15 7.15.1 7.15.2 7.15.3 7.15.4 7.16 7.16.1 7.16.2 7.16.3 7.16.4 7.16.5 7.16.6 7.16.7 Article maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining PLU (article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110 . Unit price input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overwriting the price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Article type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU article text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary text 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary text 1-10 for BLD text fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo print in BLD logo fields ............................. By Count: Pieces per package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight . . . . . . By-Count: Mandatory input of pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By-Count: Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By-Count: Fixed weight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandatory input of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overwriteable VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare % (dependent on country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print PLU (article) lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr115 . Deleting PLU (article) individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 120 . Deleting PLU (article) from - to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 121 . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 42 43 44 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 52 53 54 54 Data management Menu Pr 2-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200 . Creating header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201 . Defining scrolling message text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202 . Printing texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 205 . Deleting supplementary texts and header/footer texts . Pr 206 . Deleting supplementary text individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting all supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting scrolling message texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 210 . Defining barcode format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering a code constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting numeric codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and adopting code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administering barcode structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211 . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 55 55 56 57 58 59 59 59 59 60 61 61 62 62 64 65 6.111.98.5.01.18 0-5 List of contents Operating instruction BC II Page 7.16.8 7.16.9 7.16.10 7.16.11 7.16.12 7.17 7.17.1 7.17.2 7.17.3 7.17.4 0-6 Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 . Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . . . . . . . . Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece) . . . Barcode for non-PLU minus article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode for total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU weighed products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product groups for non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods) . . . . . . . . VAT for Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU number for non-PLU articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing BLD label list / logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 220 . Printing BLD label list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting BLD labels / logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 225 . Deleting BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting BLD logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 230 . Defining VAT rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT inclusive or exclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231 . Printing VAT list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting VAT numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Same VAT for all articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 67 67 68 68 68 68 69 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 69 69 70 70 70 70 71 71 71 71 72 72 72 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 Reports menu Pr 3-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 . Printing reports on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 310 . Scales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU report with one article text line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU report with all article text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product group report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VAT sales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing report on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 311 . Displaying / deleting sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 320 . Displaying sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 75 75 77 77 78 78 79 80 7 - 81 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 81 82 82 83 83 83 83 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II List of contents Page 7.18 7.18.1 7.18.2 7.18.3 7.18.4 7.18.5 7.18.6 7.18.7 7.18.8 7.18.9 Configuration menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr500 . Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing year either 2 or 4-digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting main operating mode Pr510 . Selecting main operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511 . Selecting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for different operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr515 . Automatic zero setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open tickets / labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Origin labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining data of origin number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandatory input for By Count pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandatory input for fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrolling message settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 516 . Selecting scrolling message no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting display location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520 . Constant key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing article and total label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Items operator display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cash register functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amount tend./change operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talon printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repeating ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing cancellation and canceled articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing included VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ticket printout, as required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for quick service mode Pr 521 . Settings for price labeling mode * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr525 . Labeling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple label printing for price per piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocating operator no. to operator keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 530 . 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 84 - 84 - 85 - 85 - 85 - 86 - 87 - 87 - 87 - 88 - 88 - 89 - 89 - 89 - 90 - 90 - 90 - 90 - 91 - 91 - 91 - 91 - 92 - 92 - 92 - 93 - 93 - 93 - 93 - 94 - 94 - 94 - 95 - 96 - 96 - 97 - 97 - 98 - 98 - 99 - 99 - 99 - 100 - 101 - 101 - 102 - 103 0-7 List of contents Operating instruction BC II Page 7.18.10 7.18.11 7.18.12 7.18.13 7.19 7.19.1 0-8 PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535 . 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad . . . . . . PLU direct key mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU direct key allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLU range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delay time PLU no. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing PLU direct keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr536 . Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540 . Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 545 . Rounding methods for customer total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding of article total * .............................. Rounding for By count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 103 103 104 104 104 105 106 107 108 7 7 7 7 - 108 109 109 110 Ticket design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 550 . Printing barcode on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode height in mm on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing tare on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing footer text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing foreign currency supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing rounding supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font change on tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket . . . . . . . Ticket counter printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing amount paid in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing header logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing footer logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 111 112 112 112 113 113 113 114 114 115 115 115 116 116 116 117 117 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II List of contents Page 7.20 7.20.1 7.20.2 7.20.3 7.20.4 Label design - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555 . Label type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Label size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing label distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packed-on and sell-by date on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode height in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tara printout on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternative text with sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beginning of text field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start of data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data field monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font change on tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing price frame and texts on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label . . . . . Printing foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) . . . . . . Alternative text for packed-on date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternative text for use-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing units on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing speed for label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 556 . Saving configuration from Pr 555 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 560 . Selecting foreign currency function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting foreign/ second currency display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency calculation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency symbol on label for price field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal places in foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rounding of foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreign currency translation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ticket call-up data volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 570 . 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 118 119 120 121 122 122 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 124 125 125 126 127 127 127 128 128 130 130 130 130 131 131 132 132 133 133 133 134 134 134 134 135 135 135 136 136 0-9 List of contents Operating instruction BC II Page 7.21 7.21.1 7.21.2 7.21.3 7.21.4 7.21.5 7.21.6 7.21.7 7.21.8 7.21.9 7.21.10 7.21.11 7.21.12 7.21.13 7.21.14 0 - 10 Commissioning menu Pr 6-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 600 . DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of scale current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP: IP address if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected .................................... DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leasing address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr601 . Printout of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602 . Setting scale number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 603 . Setting department number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 604 . Setting machine ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 605 . Commissioning (memory management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 606 . No. of PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of supplementary texts per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of BLD text fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of BLD logo fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of items (ticket memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . By count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decimal places* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using expanded RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Journal function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting database configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . Pr 607 . Scale type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicast IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multicast port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UDP port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling display lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 610 . Setting turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 615 . WLAN settings Pr 621 . Activating WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Time slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ping on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address of WLAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test telegram on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port number of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beeper on/off Pr 622 . Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 625 . Changing key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 630 . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 137 137 138 138 138 138 138 7 - 139 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 139 139 139 140 140 140 141 142 142 144 144 144 144 144 145 145 145 146 146 147 148 148 149 149 149 150 151 151 152 152 153 153 154 154 154 154 155 156 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II List of contents Page 7.21.15 7.21.16 7.21.17 7.21.18 Keyboard selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr631 . RAM clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 666 . Entering password for menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 690 . Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting . . . . . . . Pr 695 . Changing main currency to second currency (Euro) . . . . . . . . . . . Converting PLU price into EURO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 158 159 159 160 160 160 7.22 7.22.1 7.22.2 7.22.3 7.22.4 7.22.5 7.22.6 7.22.10 7.22.11 7.22.12 Service menu Pr 7-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700 . Printing boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701 . Printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr702 . Printing menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703 . Printing weighing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 704 . Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710 . Feed for labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving print format on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Correcting ticket feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing print intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712 . Displaying load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715 . Displaying program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716 . Main program version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bootloader version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 717 . Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718 . Logbook control Pr 730 . 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 - 161 161 162 163 163 164 165 165 165 166 166 166 167 167 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 168 169 170 171 7.23 Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 174 7.22.7 7.22.8 7.22.9 6.111.98.5.01.18 0 - 11 List of contents Operating instruction BC II Page 8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 8.1 Fault description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 8.2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning ................................................. device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . products for printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 9 9 - 1 1 2 4 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the weight display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Note on storing thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ticket, label and Linerless rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 9 9 - 6 6 6 6 10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 9 10.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 10.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 10.3 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 2 Subject index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 Appendix Declaration of Conformity for BC ll Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN SparkLAN WUBR-507N 0 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 1 About these instructions 1 About these instructions Read through the operating manual carefully before connecting and switching on the device to ensure that you fully utilize the quality and possibilities of application this device offers. This operating manual explains how to operate and set the device. It also includes functions that are only required by Bizerba Service. Contact your Bizerba technical consultant if necessary. Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the instructions may differ from the supplied version. 1.1 Safe-keeping This operating manual is an integral part of the device and must be kept next to it, easily accessible for all personnel. If the device is resold, the complete operating manual must be provided with it. 1.2 Target group The device may only be operated by trained personnel. This means that the operator must be familiar with the contents of this operating manual. Installation, servicing and repairs may only be performed by qualified personnel authorized by Bizerba. 6.111.98.5.01.18 1-1 About these instructions 1 1.3 Operating instruction BC II Symbols used Various symbols are used in these instructions. Symbol Meaning Text with arrow prompts you to carry out an action. Key symbols prompt you to press this key on Mod + Key symbols with a + prompt you to keep the 1st key held down while you press the second key. 1 Position numbers in figures. Text within < > describes a key. ”Display” Text within ” ” indicates the display text. Notes _______________________________________________________________________ Observance of these notes is mandatory. _______________________________________________________________________ Information _______________________________________________________________________ This information is provided for greater understanding. _______________________________________________________________________ Menu settings Prerequisites and menu settings for functions or rules are highlighted in gray. Menu settings are the prerequisites for descriptions or operation procedures. Menu setting - Pr 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted Syntax: Pr 110/ 06 -1 Pr 110 Program number “110” / 06 Submenu “06” -1 Setting “1” 1-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 1.4 About these instructions 1 Warnings Warnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word. Signal word Symbol Meaning _______________________________________________________________________ DANGER Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger for personnel! The consequences are: - critical injuries - severe damage to health Measures to avoid the danger are specified. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threatening danger for personnel! The consequences can be: - serious injuries - damage to health - serious damage to property Measures to avoid the danger are specified. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION Source of danger with low risk with potentially threatening danger for personnel! The consequences can be: - Injuries - Damage to property Measures to avoid the danger are specified. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION Source of danger, improper use! Damage to property can result. Measures to avoid the danger are specified. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 1-3 About these instructions Operating instruction BC II 1 1-4 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 2 Device 2.1 Device types About the device 2 The BC II device type is available with either a thermal ticket printer or a label printer. T = Thermal ticket printer E = Label printer BC II 800 T BC II 800 E Fig. 1: BC II 800 BC II 100 T BC II 100 E Fig. 2: BC II 100 BC II 200 T BC II 200 E Fig. 3: BC II 200 2.2 Accessories We offer a comprehensive accessories program for the device. Please contact your Bizerba technical consultant for further information. 2.3 Intended use The BC II scale is particularly suitable for counter sales, quick and self-service, as well as manual price labeling and simple cash reg. (POS) functions. Use devices only for intended use. 6.111.98.5.01.18 2-1 About the device 2.4 2 Operating instruction BC II Designation label Designation label of a verified scale. Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels: Explanations of the individual labels: 11147xxxxx Designation label no. CE 13 CE certification with the last two digits of the year in which the CE certification was applied. 0103 Identification number of the appointed body ”Verification Ma‐ nagement - Stuttgart” D07-09-014 No. of EC type approval M green square symbol (sign for EC-first verification) BIZERBA Manufacturer BCII Type designation (basic type) Nr./No. Device No. Max 6 kg Maximum load Max Min 20 g Minimum load Min e=2g Verification value , e T= - 6 kg Subtractive tare maximum load T= - 120-240V 0.35-0.25A 50/60Hz Electrical data Scale accuracy class III Device must not be disposed of in domestic waste. Return to the manufacturer or dealer Note the statutory regulations in your country 2-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 2.5 About the device Verification information 2 Verification information for EC countries The green M (sign for EC-first verification) is on the designation label of the scale. This type of scale can be put into operation and used on site provided that it is not connected to an additional device, e.g. cash register or printer. Scales that are connected on site to an additional device (e.g. cash register or printer) must have their first verification carried out either by the responsible verification office or by a verification officer from Bizerba. Scales as well as the additional device (e.g. cash register) must be tested and verified. If the scale fulfills the verification specifications with their additional device, it can be used in legal for trade applications. In the case of extensions at a later date, once the scale has already been put into operation, the relevant verification office must be informed. Scales and additional devices without the CE mark may not be used in legal for trade operations. Scales that are verified to a specific verification zone (acceleration of fall) (details are given on the designation label) may not be used in other verification zones without being reverified. According to statutory regulations, the user of a scale must ensure that it is used for its intended purpose. This includes observation of the verification guidelines, in particular amendments, supplements and additions. Reverification information Reverification of scales is executed according to the respective statutory country regulations. The verification validity period in Germany for example, for scales is usually 2 years. Price labeling scales have a verification validity period of 1 year. The verification validity period begins when the scales are put into circulation (installation and commissioning). Please refer here to the designation label (in the present example, 2007, as the designation is CE 07). Verification information for non-EU countries The statutory regulations of the specific countries must be observed. _______________________________________________________________________ A yellow mark of conformity is affixed to the load receptor of the scale, with the inscription ”Verified by BIZERBA” (first verification by Bizerba). Reverifications must be carried out by the operator of the scale according to the legal requirements. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 2-3 About the device 2.6 2 Operating instruction BC II Standards and guidelines The equipment fulfils the following requirements: Measuring technology Directive 90/384/EEC scales guidelines ”nonautomatic scales” OIML R76-Ed. 2006 Organisation internationale de métrologie légale Nonautomatic weighing instruments DIN EN 45501 Metrological aspects of nonautomatic scales OIML R60 Metrological regulation for load cells WELMEC 2.3 Guideline for software testing Handbook 44 Specifications, tolerances and other technical require‐ ments for weighing and measuring devices (USA) Publication 14 Weighing devices, Checklist, Test procedures (USA)Weights and Measures Act (Canada) Electromagnetic compatibility Directive 2004/108/ EC EMC-guideline DIN EN 61000-6-1/ 2007-10 interference resistance Residential, commercial and light industry DIN EN 61000-6-3/ 2007-09 emitted interference Residential, commercial and light industry DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10 Harmonics current DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06 Voltage fluctuations and flickers GB 9254-1998 Information Technology Equipment - Radio Disturbance Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement Electrical safety Directive 2006/ 95 EC Low voltage guideline IEC 60950-1/ 2001 Information technology equipment - Safety DIN EN 60950-1/ 2006-11 Information technology equipment - Safety UL 60950-1/ 2006-07 Information technology equipment - Safety DIN EN 60529/ 2000-09 Protection types provided by housing (IP code) 2-4 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 2.7 About the device Operating conditions Do not install or commission equipment until the operating conditions have been fulfilled. - Temperature and air humidity: The permitted values and class of protection are found on the designation label on the device and on page 10 - 2. - Installation area A flat, vibration-free position as well as the driest possible installation must be guaranteed for our equipment. Vibrations can affect measurements made by the scales. - Align horizontally To ensure the precision of the sales, it is of absolute necessity that the device is aligned horizontally. - Draft Drafts can affect the measurements made by the scales. - Air convection Free air convection must be able to form around the device in order to avoid inadmissible heating. - Supply voltage The permitted values can be found on the designation label on the device - and see page 10 - 2. - Trained personnel: Only trained personnel can maximize the performance of the device and avoid risks. - Written consent for modifications: Modifications to the devices require our prior written consent. External data dialog between Bizerba equipment and other manufacturers' equipment, the hardware and software required, test and modification work, must be clarified with us in writing. Please contact us or our competent customer service points if you have any doubts regarding the practical application of these conditions. For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions. 6.111.98.5.01.18 2-5 2 About the device 2.7.1 2 Operating instruction BC II Power supply The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following commissions: - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) - European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) - Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE) Our units are built to VDE protection class I and must be connected to a protective conductor. Interference suppression measures If the mains power supply is subject to electric interference, interference suppression measures must be taken on site, e.g.: - provision of separate mains cable to our equipment. - in problem cases, insertion of capacitively decoupled isolating transformers or other suppressors into the mains supply lines to our equipment. 2-6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 2.8 About the device Warranty Installation, commissioning and initial training must be carried out by trained staff from our sales offices and customer service points or by companies authorized by us. We do not accept any liability for damages resulting from: - Non-compliance with our operating conditions and operating manual. - Defective electrical installation by the customer. - Structural changes to our equipment. - Removal of verification seals and fuse stamps. - Incorrect programming and operation. - Natural wear and tear.. The warranty will lapse if defects/damage occur as a result of interventions by persons we have not authorized or the use of non-Bizerba genuine spare parts. If you reset or program devices, check the new setting with a test run and test printout. This helps to avoid faulty results. Only trained staff may operate the equipment. Check that our products are handled correctly and repeat training if necessary. Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the operating manual may differ from the supplied version. 2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection _______________________________________________________________________ Only applies to Germany! _______________________________________________________________________ This device includes batteries which are subject to the Batteries Act concerning return and disposal of used batteries and accumulators. This act holds you as the end user responsible to return the device to the manufacturer or its distributor for the purpose of recycling and proper disposal after the end of its intended use. Bizerba and its distributors are ready to except the returns of your old devices which are no longer operated. In these instances, please, contact your Bizerba specialist in charge. If the device includes a chargeable battery pack, according to the Battery Act you are responsible to return used battery packs to the distributor or to return locations which are provided to the public. Of course, Bizerba and its distributors will also accept your used battery packs. 6.111.98.5.01.18 2-7 2 About the device Operating instruction BC II 2 2-8 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 3 Safety instructions Safety instructions The safety instructions must be observed throughout the installation, operation, cleaning and maintenance procedures. 3.1 3 Requirements on the operating personnel The device may only be operated by people who have been instructed in the operating procedure. The operating personnel must read and understand the safety instructions in this Operating Manual. Please pay special attention to and memorize all safety and hazard information! Carry out regular training! Operators (purchasers) as well as supervisory and operating staff must carry out programming and data protection on our systems and equipment exclusively in accordance with our operating and programming instructions. Only use equipment for its intended purpose. 3.2 Device signs Remove the mains plug from the socket Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket 6.111.98.5.01.18 3-1 Safety instructions 3.3 Operating instruction BC II Sources of risk related to the system _______________________________________________________________________ 3 For safety reasons, shut equipment down immediately in the event of recurring faults, damage of any type, and suspicion of risk of injury. Always inform the nearest customer service point. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Check before mains connection Before connecting the device, check - the power supply data on the designation label - the power supply data of the mains supply _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING Incorrect supply voltage ! Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire. - Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power supply data do not match the connection values of the scale. The power supply data must be identical. - Inform Bizerba Customer Service. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION Voltage at switched-off scale! Even when the scale is switched off, the scale electronics is live. - Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING Opening the device! Electric shock. - The device may only be opened by trained and qualified Bizerba personnel. _______________________________________________________________________ 3-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 4 Installation 4.1 Transport and storage Installation Always transport and store the device in the original packaging 4 4.2 Installation and assembly Installation, first commissioning, adjustment, initial instruction, Maintenance and repair may only be performed by our customer service and/or by companies or persons authorized by us. 4.2.1 Conditions for the place of installation The place of installation must fulfil the following conditions. - Flat installation surface. - Freedom from vibrations, oscillations and drafts, as well as the driest possible installation must be guaranteed for our equipment. - The equipment must be arranged with respect for operating and work sequence, and taking account of maintenance aspects. 4.2.2 Assemble the device Unpacking Open packaging, remove accessories and lift the device carefully out of the packaging. 6.111.98.5.01.18 4-1 Installation 4.2.3 Operating instruction BC II Leveling To compensate for any small irregularities in the floor space, the scale can be leveled at the foot screws using a spirit level. _______________________________________________________________________ 4 After each change of location, the scale must be re-leveled. _______________________________________________________________________ 1 Position the spirit level 2 Foot screws 1 2 Fig. 6: BC II 800 2 1 Fig. 7: BC II 100 Turn the foot screws 2 until the air bubble 3 is located in the center of the spirit level . 1 1 3 Fig. 8: Leveling 4-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 4.2.4 Installation Check the electric connection _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING Incorrect supply voltage! Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire. - Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power supply data do not match the connection values of the scale. The power supply data must be identical. - Inform Bizerba Customer Service. _______________________________________________________________________ Installation of customer's power supply The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following commissions: - International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) - European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) - Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE) _______________________________________________________________________ Check before mains connection Before connecting the device, check - the power supply data on the designation label - the power supply data of the mains supply _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 4-3 4 Installation 4.2.5 Operating instruction BC II Cable connections _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION 4 Do not insert or remove the connection cable when the device is switched on. Interfaces are either defect or misfunctioning. Always switch off the device before inserting or removing the connection cable. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Secure the power cable against falling out when strain drops. 4 _______________________________________________________________________ 1 EDP (scale network) 2 Cash drawer 1 3 Power cable 2 4 Clip (strain relief) 4 3 Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200 1 EDP (scale network) 2 Cash drawer 3 Power cable 4 Clip (strain relief) 2 1 4 3 Fig. 10: BC II 800 4-4 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Installation Example of scale network Several scales are connected with a switch. Switch 4 Scale1 1 1 Scale 2 1 Scale 3 1 Scale 4 1 Scale 5 1 Scale 6 1 Connection scale (EDP, scale network) _______________________________________________________________________ During installation and cabling of systems the Bizerba guideline “Networks for scales” need to be adhered to. Ask your Bizerba consultant or Bizerba Service. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 4-5 Installation 4.2.6 Operating instruction BC II Rechargeable battery The BC II devices are available with and without rechargeable batteries. _______________________________________________________________________ WARNING 4 Replace the rechargeable battery! Risk of explosion if not replaced properly. - The installation or removal of the battery may only be carried out by our customer services and/or a company or person assigned by us. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Charge battery completely before battery operation. Procedure: - Connect mains to scale. - Switch on scale. _______________________________________________________________________ Depending on the use and ambient temperature, with a fully charged battery, the scales can be operated for 20-25 hours without being connected to the mains. After only 6-7 hours charging time the battery is completely recharged. Operation with rechargeable batteries Rechargeable batteries will run down even during prolonged idle periods if the scale is not connected to the mains. Therefore, connect the scale to the mains at least every 3months. If the scales are being powered by the mains, the batteries are recharged when switched on (conservation charging). _______________________________________________________________________ If the scales are operated at an ambient temperature below 0_C, the battery cannot be recharged. _______________________________________________________________________ Overloading the batteries is prevented automatically by an integrated charging circuit. This charging circuit also prevents any damaging total discharge. The battery lifetime reduces if it is permanently operated at an almost discharged state. _______________________________________________________________________ When being operated by battery, the printer prints at a slower speed. Due to this intentional reduced printing speed, the scales can be operated for a longer period when not connected to the mains power supply. _______________________________________________________________________ 4-6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Installation Battery icon display 1 4 kg EURO per EUR Fig. 11: Display 1 Battery icon When connected to the mains: --Battery icon not visible. Scales is connected to the mains. The batteries are charged. Arrow flashes slowly Battery is being charged. Arrow flashes very fast The temperature of the battery is less than 0€C. A statement as to the charged state of the battery cannot be made. When battery operated: Arrow flashes permanently The charging of the battery is OK. Arrow flashes fast Warning, batteries require charging. Depending on the age of the battery and the ambient temperature, it is possible to continue operations for about 60 minutes. Arrow flashes very fast. In addition, a permanent tone occurs for approx. 10 sec. The battery is empty. The device is switched off after 10 seconds. 6.111.98.5.01.18 4-7 Installation 4.3 Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Commissioning, as well as instruction on the operation, cleaning, maintenance and servicing is carried out by the relevant Bizerba customer services office or the Bizerba trade consultant. 4 4.3.1 Switch on device Prerequisite - The device has been installed properly and connected to the mains power supply. - The scale should not be loaded. Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1. 4.4 Decommissioning If you wish to decommission the scale for a prolonged period of time, - Switch the scale off. - Remove the AC power plug and detach all cable connections. - Clean the scale in accordance with the cleaning instructions. 4-8 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Device and operating controls 5 Device and operating controls 5.1 Main switch 5 2 1 Fig. 12: BC II 1 Main switch on BC II 800 2 Main switch on BC II 100 and 200 6.111.98.5.01.18 5-1 Device and operating controls 5.2 Operating instruction BC II Display 1 2 3 4 5 kg 7 EURO per 6 EUR 5 Fig. 13: Dot 7 display The display is divided into: 1 Dot Matrix (20x208 Dots) 2 Lit icons 3 Symbols printed on the glass panel (dependent on country) 4 Light symbol for system identification 5 Selling price 6 Unit price 7 Weight value 5.2.1 Display icons Type- and country-dependent icons designate different operating states. The printed icons are marked by arrows that light up. = Net display after taring process = Prepack = Battery operation/battery charging control, = Unit price per kg = Unit price per 100g = Fixed unit price = Constant unit price = Operator number after registration = Character for display of total I = Symbol for single division scale II = Symbol for dual division scale = Symbol for fixed weight for dot 7 display = Symbol for fixed weight for 7 segment display 5-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 5.3 Device and operating controls Keyboard _______________________________________________________________________ Keyboard designs are country-dependent. _______________________________________________________________________ 5 5.3.1 Membrane keyboard There are two transparent modules on the membrane keyboard into which insert-foils can be inserted if required. 2 Insert-foil 30 keys DEU (Country ID, e.g. DEU defines keyboard labeling) Insert-foil 54 keys DEU 3 Membrane keyboard 54 keys 4 Membrane keyboard 30 keys 1 4 3 2 1 Fig. 14: Example of insert-foils Example: 3 2 Fig. 15: Insert foil with 54 key 4 1 Fig. 16: Insert foil with 30 keys. 6.111.98.5.01.18 5-3 Device and operating controls 5.3.2 1 Operating instruction BC II Keyboard Keyboard 84 keys 1 5 Fig. 17: Keyboard 5.3.3 Key functions Fig. 18: Example of keyboard 5-4 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Key Tab 1 Device and operating controls Function - 54 to PLU = Price Look Up (product plus price, text, etc. is displayed) Z A 19 - 15 1 - Non-numeric and special characters (function only in menu) 5 Operator 1 to Operator 4 - ) ] 0 T1 T1 - T4 to St A (country-specific version) Void (country-specific version) Mod Esc / PLU Man / (country-specific version) 6.111.98.5.01.18 5-5 Device and operating controls Key Operating instruction BC II Function 5 F Prepack (country-specific version) (country-specific version) Tare (country-specific version) Ctrl Enter (country-specific version) (delete) Clr (delete) (country-specific version) 5-6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 5.3.4 Device and operating controls Keyboard options Menu setting - Pr631 - 00 to 03 keyboard selection, see page 7 - 158 Additional frame with 24 keys 5 Additional frame for 24 PLUs. The additional frame is attached to the basic keyboard. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Fig. 19: Additional 24PLU frame 1 Additional frame 2 Write-on insert Front-foil with 30 keys Front-foil with 30 PLU keys. The front-foil is placed over the top of the basic keyboard. 1 2 Fig. 20: Front foil 30 PLU 1 Front membrane 2 Write-on insert 6.111.98.5.01.18 5-7 Device and operating controls 5.4 Operating instruction BC II Printer Models BC II 100 to BC II 800 are equipped with label printer. The printers operate according to the thermal printing principle. The paper can only be printed on the thermal side. 5 5.4.1 Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 Printer lid BC II 100/200 open The printer lid arrows 3 . 3 2 is marked on the top with Hold the printer lid at the positions marked by the 3 arrows. Open the printer lid by pulling it downwards. 2 Fig. 21: Printer lid BC II 100/200 close Fold the printer lid upwards. Side cover BC II 100/ 200 Open Hold the side cover 1 at the fluted grip. Open the side cover pulling it downwards. close 1 Close the side cover by pulling it upwards. 1 Fig. 22: Side cover BC II 100/ 200 5-8 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Device and operating controls Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 Side cover BC II 800 Open Hold the slide cover at the 1 grips. 1 5 Open the side cover pulling it downwards. close Close the side cover by pulling it upwards. Fig. 23: Side cover BC II 800 Printer lid The printer lid is arrows 3 . 2 marked at the bottom with Open 2 Take hold of the printer lid 2 at the places marked with the arrows. 3 Open the printer lid by pulling it upwards. 3 Fig. 24: BC II 800 Open printer lid close 2 Fold the printer lid down 2 . Fig. 25: BC II 800 Close printer lid 6.111.98.5.01.18 5-9 Device and operating controls 5.4.2 Operating instruction BC II Opening and closing the thermal print head BC II 100/200 2 open 5 Place one finger underneath the red grip element 1 . Pull the grip element 1 towards you until the thermal print head disengages and folds down. 2 1 close Fig. 26: Label printer in BC II 100 Place your finger on the red grip element 1 . Press the thermal print head 2 upwards against the printer roller and then backwards until the thermal print head engages. BC 800 open Place your index finger underneath the red grip element. 1 . 1 Push the grip element 1 upwards until the thermal print head disengages. 2 Fold the thermal print head upwards. 2 Fig. 27: Opening the thermal print head close Place your thumb on the red grip element. Push the thermal print head backwards against the printer roller and then downwards until the thermal print head engages. Fig. 28: Closing the thermal print head 5 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 5.4.3 Device and operating controls Ticket roll Run out of ticket paper The paper end is indicated by a red mark on the paper. When this mark appears, insert a new ticket roll. Paper feed for label printer with ticket paper 5 1 take-up arbor 2 ticket roll 3 deflection roller with red adjustable ring 4 thermal print head 5 printer roller 1 2 Insert new ticket roll Open the side cover and printer cover, see page 5 - 9. 5 4 Open the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Remove the empty core of the ticket roll. Insert a new ticket roll 2 3 Abb. 29: Paper feed for ticket paper / BC II 800 . Feed the ticket paper around the take-up arbor 1 and the deflection bolt 3 as shown in the figure. Insert paper until the paper edge protrudes the thermal print head 4 by approx. 80mm. 1 2 3 Abb. 30: Paper feed ticket paper / BC II 800 Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Open the side cover and printer cover, see page 5 - 9. 6.111.98.5.01.18 5 - 11 Device and operating controls 5.4.4 Operating instruction BC II Label End of label After printing the last label, insert a new label roll. 1 Insert label roll 5 3 Open the side cover and printer lid, see page 5 - 8. Open the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Remove the label roll from the take-up pin. 3 . Pull the red peel-off unit 6 outwards. 4 Pull the backing paper off the take-up pin. 1 5 Pull 5 labels off the backing paper of the new label roll. Place the new label roll take-up pin. 3 . 4 on the 2 Insert the backing paper in accordance with the direction of the paper and attach it to the take-up pin. 1 . The Backing paper must be positioned on collar. 2 6 Press the red peel-off unit 6 inwards. Fig. 31: BC II 100 Label printer Turn the take-up pin 1 manually until the first label is peeled off. Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10. Close the side cover and printer lid, see page 5 - 8. 5 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Device and operating controls 1 Paper track in label printer 1 11 10 Take-up arbor for backing paper 2 Collar 3 Holding arbor 4 Label roll 5 Deflection pin with red adjustable ring 6 Thermal strip 7 Printer roller 8 Label detachment shaft 9 Deflection pin 10 Transport roller 11 Deflection roller with adjustable ring 2 9 8 3 7 6 4 5 Abb. 32: Paper track in label printer / BCII800 1 1 Take-up arbor for backing paper 2 Collar 3 Holding arbor 4 Label roll 5 Deflection pin with red adjustable ring 6 Thermal strip 7 Printer roller 8 Label detachment shaft 9 Deflection pin 10 10 2 3 9 8 5 7 4 6 Transport roller Abb. 33: Paper track in label printer / BCII100/200 Set width of paper Adjust the red adjustable ring 5 to the deflection roller by pushing it to the size of the label. This is necessary for each paper change and when changing the paper width. 5 Fig. 34: Adjustable ring 6.111.98.5.01.18 5 - 13 5 Device and operating controls Operating instruction BC II 5 5 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation 6 Operation 6.1 Switching on device The mains switch is located - on the left side of the scale in the case of BCII 100 / BCII 200 - on the right side of the scale in the case of BCII 800. 6 The scale should not be loaded. Press mains switch . ”Boot” appears in the display. The display test occurs automatically. All digits and symbols are displayed for approx. 5 sec.. The weight value display is then automatically set to zero ”0.000” with the scale unloaded and is ready for weighing. 6.2 Switch off device Press mains switch . The display goes dark after a short time. 6.3 Zerosetting device After switching on the scale the weight display ranges automatically at zero ”0.000” kg provided that the scale is unloaded. The scale has an automatic reset device, so that minor zero point changes are compensated automatically. The weight value display can (if the display is not set to zero) be reset again with the scale unloaded. ) ] 0 Press . The weight value display indicates ”0,000” kg. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6-1 Operation 6.4 Operating instruction BC II Operating options Operating processes marked with an * are not available for all country versions. Different operating types can be set in the device: 1. Multi-operating mode 6 see page 6-2 2. Self-service operation see page 6 - 3 3. Quick-service operation see page 6 - 4 4. Price labeling with manual triggering * see page 6 - 6 5. Price labeling with automatic start * see page 6 - 7 6.4.1 Multiple-operator mode Multiple salespeople can operate the device at the same time. Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 - Pr 510/ 02 - Pr 510/ 04 - Pr 520 Set multiple operator mode Set ticket or label layout Set type of paper Set submenu 01 to 08. General operating procedure Place the article on the scale. Input price ! @ 2 Press PLU direct key, e.g. . or Enter the unit price directly, e.g. EUR 2.98 PLU registration 1 Press operator key e.g.. Ticket layout: The article is registered but not printed. Label layout: The article is registered and the label is printed. Printout of the article depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02. Conclude sale Press . 1 Press the operator key, e.g. . Ticket layout: Item and total are printed on ticket. Label layout: Printout of the article and the total depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02, see page 7 - 95. 6-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.4.2 Operation Self-service mode _______________________________________________________________________ The article can only be called up via on PLU direct key. - Only PLU direct keys under which weight articles are stored can be called up. Piece PLU, manual PLU or minus PLU cannot be called up - you hear an acoustic signal. - Reports cannot be created in this operating mode. _______________________________________________________________________ Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 - Pr 510/ 02 1 - Pr 510/ 04 -1 Setting self-service mode Setting label layout Set label paper Operating procedure: Place the article on the scale. Print article ! @ 2 Press the PLU direct key of the article applied e.g. . The label is printed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6-3 6 Operation 6.4.3 Operating instruction BC II Quick-service mode Register with operator key Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr521 -0 Setting self-service mode Setting label layout Recording with operator key Operating procedure: 6 Place the article on the scale. Call up article ! @ 2 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . Register article and print 1 Press operator key . The label is printed. or (dependent on country) Press . The label is printed. Register automatically Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 521 -1 Setting self-service mode Setting label layout register automatically Operating procedure: Place the article on the scale. Call up article, then register and print ! @ 2 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . It is registered to Operator 1. The label is printed. 6-4 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation Automatic recording with fixed PLU Customer-specific Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -03 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 521 -1 - Pr 631/ 01 Set quick-service operation Set label layout Automatic recording 84-keyboard with 24 key self-service frame Operating procedure: 6 Place product on scale. Call up, record and print article ! @ 2 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . Recording with respect to Operator 1. The label is printed. The called up PLU remains unchanged until another PLU is called up. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6-5 Operation 6.4.4 Operating instruction BC II Price labeling with manual triggering * Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 525/ 01 6 Price labeling with release by hand Label layout Setting labeling mode Call up article Place the article on the scale. ! @ 2 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated. Register article and print label 1 Press operator key e.g.. The label is printed. Remove the article from the scale. Place the next article on the scale. 1 Press operator key e.g.. You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called up, or until the key is pressed. Create batch sum label * Menu setting - Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition Press . The batch sum label is printed. 6-6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.4.5 Operation Price labeling with automatic start * Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -05 - Pr 510/ 02 -1 - Pr 525/ 01 Price labeling with automatic release Label layout Setting labeling mode Call up article 6 Place the article on the scale. '' 3 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated. Register article and print label 1 Press operator key e.g.. The label is printed. Remove the article from the scale. Place the article on the scale. The label is printed. Printing happens automatically after each change of weight. You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called up, or until the key is pressed. Create batch sum label * Menu setting - Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition Press . The batch sum label is printed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6-7 Operation 6.4.6 Operating instruction BC II Piece price multi- label printing A number of identical price per piece labels can be created in price labeling mode. Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 - Pr525/ 02 -00-99 Price labeling Time in sec. between printing of two labels General operating procedure 6 Input price. $ 4 Press the PLU direct key for unit price e.g. . The constant function 1 K is activated. 1,50 1 Define number of labels K Press . K Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15. 00 1,50 15 1,50 14 1,50 00 1,50 0, 00 0,00 PLU registration 1 Press operator key e.g.. K The labels are printed. The number of labels being printed is continually displayed. K End Press . 6-8 0,000 K 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.4.7 Operation Fixed weight label multi-printing A number of identical fixed weight labels can be created in price labeling mode. Menu setting - Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 - Pr525/ 02 -00-99 Price labeling Time in sec. between printing of two labels General operating procedure $ Press the PLU direct key for fixed 4 weight e.g. . The constant function 1 is activated. 6 1 0,500 K 12, 00 6,00 Define number of labels + Press and hold . Then press K K Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15. __ 15 Press The number of labels is herewith confirmed. PLU registration 1 Press operator key e.g.. The labels are printed. 0,500 K 12, 00 6,00 End Press . 6.111.98.5.01.18 6-9 Operation 6.5 Operating instruction BC II Unit price input via 10-key keypad _______________________________________________________________________ With key you can switch between entry of unit price and PLU no. Switchover depends on the setting in Pr 535. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.5.1 6 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) Unit price input Price/kg Place article on the scale. 0,556 0,00 0,00 0,556 8,56 4,76 Enter the unit price. Read off the selling price. 1 Register e.g. on operator . The selling price is saved to the buffer. Price per piece manual input Non-weighed 0,00 Press . Enter the price per piece, Non-weighed 8,65 e.g. 8.65 1 Register e.g. on operator . Multiplication of price per piece non-weighed 0,000 0,00 Non-weighed 0,00 Press . Enter the price per piece, e.g. 8.65 [1] 0,00 Non-weighed 8,65 Non-weighed Press . _0 8,65 _5 8,65 0,00 0,00 Non-weighed Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5. 1 Register e.g. on operator . 6 - 10 0,000 [1] 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Entry of minus amount - Operation Minus 0,00 Press . Enter the price per piece, Minus - 1,00 e.g. 1.00 1 Register e.g. on operator . Multiplication of minus amount input - 0,000 0,00 [1] 0,00 Minus 0,00 Press Minus Enter the price per piece, e.g. 1.00 - 1,00 Minus Press . _0 - 1,00 _5 - 1,00 Minus Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5. 1 Register e.g. on operator . 6.111.98.5.01.18 0,000 0,00 [1] 0,00 6 - 11 6 Operation 6.6 Operating instruction BC II Cancellation If the sale is not yet completed (before final total), individual articles can be canceled. Cancel lastly sold article Op. Pcs 1 6 [1] Press . 0,00 Press operator key e.g.. [1] 8,60 The last items are displayed. St Press . The displayed items are canceled. 0,000 0,00 [1] 0,00 Search for article by ”Scrolling” and cancelling Several articles have already been sold; a defined article is now to be canceled. St 1 Press . Press operator key e.g.. The last items are displayed. Scroll until the article you want appears on the display. St Press . The displayed items are canceled. Quit cancellation You start the Cancel function and want to abort this without starting a cancellation. Pcs 1 Press . Op. [1] 0,00 Press operator key e.g.. [1] 8,60 The last items are displayed. Press . 0,000 0,00 You have quit the Cancel function. The article is still registered. 6 - 12 [1] 0,00 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.7 Operation Scroll function After selling several articles (before total completion) the single articles can be checked in the display by Pcs 1 Press . Press operator key e.g.. The last items are displayed. 6 upwards. The items are displayed in descending order. Press . The scroll function is closed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 13 Operation 6.8 Operating instruction BC II Constant Fix unit price or tare value, or unit price and tare value, e.g. for several sequenced sales of the same article. Depending on menu setting in Pr520/ 01. PLU articles are fixated if you hold down the constant key, independent of the setting in Pr 520/ 01. Menu setting - Pr 520/ 01 6 Constant key function Switch on fixing. The symbol Switch off fixing. The symbol 6.9 illuminates before before or or (dependent on country). goes out (depending on country) Subtotal The subtotal can be displayed (but not deleted) after the sale of one or more articles. Press . 1 Press operator key e.g.. Op. [1] 0,00 Total [1] 8,60 The subtotal is displayed. 6.10 Total The final total occurs after the sale of one or more articles. Op. [1] Press . 1 Press operator key e.g.. 0,00 Total The total is displayed. The registered items and the total are printed. The buffer for operator 1 is cleared. 6 - 14 * [1] 8,60 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation 6.11 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) 6.11.1 Calling up PLUs Prerequisite - Pr 110/ PLU no/ Submenu 1 to 14 PLU articles are created The PLU call can be implemented by two methods: - Press the PLU direct key. PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad. 6 PLU direct key Stored PLUs can be called up directly via PLU direct keys. Tab Press the PLU direct key e.g. . 1 The stored values for PLU 1 appear in the display. Second level of PLU direct keys With twice as many PLUs can be accessed directly, as defined on the keyboard. Tab + 1 Press and hold and then press PLU direct key, e.g. . The stored values for PLU 51, for example, appear in the display. Example 1: There are 50 PLU direct keys on the keyboard. By pressing + PLU 51 is accessed. Example 2: 30 PLU direct keys are defined with Pr 631 on the keyboard. By pressing + PLU 31 is accessed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 15 Operation Operating instruction BC II PLU input with ten-digit keyboard The input depends on the menu setting Pr5 35. As an example, select PLU1: Menu setting - Pr 535/01 -0 - Pr 535/ 02 Ten-digit keyboard: Unit price input Number of PLU input digits Operating procedure Press , 6 PLU ___ PLU __1 and PLU number on the 10-key keypad, e.g. <1>. Confirm with . Calf liver paté 0.002 -0,002 12,55 _______________________________________________________________________ PLU 1 is displayed. Operating procedure - If all digits are entered, it must not be confirmed with . The PLU is displayed immediately. - If a delay time is set in Pr 535/ 06, the PLU is displayed after a time delay. This must not be confirmed with . _______________________________________________________________________ or Menu setting - Pr 535/01 -1 - Pr 535/ 02 Ten-digit keyboard: PLU input Number of PLU input digits Operating procedure Press the PLU number on the ten-digit keypad, e.g. <1>. Confirm with . PLU 1 is displayed. 6 - 16 PLU ___ ___1 Calf liver paté -0,002 12,55 0.002 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.11.2 Operation Operator sales with PLU Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. Place the article on the scale. Tab 1 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . 1 Register, e.g. on operator 1 . 6 ”Overwrite” PLU unit price”. The unit price for the article (PLU unit price) is stored. When the PLU is called up the saved unit price is displayed. If price-overwriting is permitted, the unit price may be changed. If the PLU is called up again, the stored unit price is still valid. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06-1 Price overwriting permissible Place the article on the scale. Tab 1 Press the PLU direct key e.g. . Press , Enter the unit price, e.g. 20.30 1 Register, e.g. on operator 1 . Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces Press a PLU direct key with stored article type is ”Non-weighed” or ”Minus”, e.g. . 1 1,50 Press . Smoked sausage 0 1,50 Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 22. Smoked sausage 22 1,50 0,000 0,00 Register e.g. on operator 1 . 6.111.98.5.01.18 Smoked sausage 0,00 [1] 6 - 17 Operation Operating instruction BC II Register manual weight input ( depending on country) Menu setting - Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on. - Setting into operation see page 7 - 33 Press a PLU direct key with stored PLU type is ”Non-weighed” or ”Minus”, e.g. . 6 Press . Smoked sausage 0,118 3,49 0,40 Smoked sausage 0,000 3,49 0,00 Smoked sausage 0,220 3,49 0,76 0,000 0,00 Enter the known weight, e.g. 0.220kg. Press Entry confirmed, selling price is displayed. 1 Register e.g. on operator 1 . 6 - 18 0,00 [1] 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation 6.12 Tare functions 6.12.1 Tare balancing for unknown tare values _______________________________________________________________________ An unknown tare weight ( empties) is a non-article related tare which is to be weighed and tared. - For scales under a 10 kg weighing range, the entire weighing range can be tared. - For scales over a 10 kg weighing range, only up to max. 9.995 kg (max. 4-digit) can be tared (country-dependent). - The tared value is subtracted from the total weighing range. - The tare command is only directly executed when the weight display is stationary. - If an unknown tare was tared with key , it cannot be overwritten with a known tare (hand tare, PLU tare). - After balancing an unknown tare, a PLU call is possible with PLU tare, but the PLU tare is ignored. _______________________________________________________________________ Unknown tare Weigh article as an empty with unknown weight. Place the empty container on the scale. The weight display 1 indicates the weight of the empty container e.g.: ”0,535” kg. 0,535 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,535 0,00 Press . The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. The weight display 1 indicates zero. 0,000 NET Fill the empty container with the article. The weight display 1 indicates the net weight of the article ”2,000” kg. The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. 6.111.98.5.01.18 2 1 2,000 1 0,535 0,00 0,00 2 6 - 19 6 Operation Operating instruction BC II Batch tare (country-related) Determine unknown tare, weigh article, add this to the tare weight and weigh the next article net. Place the empty container on the scale. The weight display 1 indicates the weight of the empty container, e.g.: ”0,535” kg. 6 0,535 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,535 0,00 1 Press . The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. The weight display 1 indicates zero. Fill the empty container with the article. The weight display 1 indicates the net weight of the article ”0.800” kg. The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. Press . Weight of article and of empty container are added to the new tare weight 2 . The weight display 1 indicates zero. 0,000 2 1 NET 0,800 0,00 2 1 NET 0,000 1 0,535 0,00 1,353 0,00 0,00 2 For scales under 10 kg you can tare the entire weighing range. 6 - 20 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.12.2 Operation Tare balancing for known tare values _______________________________________________________________________ Known tare - When weighing a packaged article, the tare value must be known (packaging/product-related tare). - For multiple-division scales, the known tare must always be located within the smallest division range (country-dependent). - A known (input) tare cannot be overwritten by an unknown (weighed) tare. - The known tare can be input by 2 methods: 1. Manual tare 2. Tare with PLU tare _______________________________________________________________________ Manual tare (country-related) _______________________________________________________________________ Manual taring is not allowed in various countries. _______________________________________________________________________ Prerequisite - The scale should not be loaded. Weight value ”0,000” kg. 0,00 _,___ 0,00 0,00 _,_52 0,00 0,00 0,052 0,00 Press . The manual tare input is opened. 0,000 Enter the known tare value, e.g. 0,052 kg. 0,000 Press . The input tare value is accepted. The display shows the tare 2 value and the net weight value 1 . NET -0,052 1 6.111.98.5.01.18 2 6 - 21 6 Operation Operating instruction BC II PLU tare Assign known tare value in menu Pr 110 to the respective PLU article. Menu setting - Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 Enter article-related tare values The PLU tare value is activated and displayed via the PLU call. 6 Tab 1 Press e.g. . Calf liver paté NET -0,002 0,00 0.002 0,00 Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 Menu setting - Pr 540 T1 Allocate known tare values to the tare keys Press e.g. . The saved tare value is displayed. NET -0,004 0,00 0,004 0,00 Tare clearing 1. Manual Unload the scale. Press . The display indicates zero. 2. Automatically 1 Register article, e.g. on operator 1 . Unload the scale. The display indicates zero. The unit price is also deleted. 6 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.12.3 Operation Operator tare An operator can save a tare value on an operator key. This tare value can be called up any time. Prerequisite - Pr 630 - Pr 630 Key must exist. Key must exist. Save tare value weighed Save tare value of an empty container on operator key e.g. . Operating procedure: F12 1 6 Place empty container on scale. 0,060 0,00 0,00 . Op. 0,060 0,00 0,00 0,000 0,00 -0,060 0,00 0,060 0,00 0,060 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,00 . Op. 0,000 0,00 0,00 Press operator key. Op. 0,000 0,00 -,- - 0,00 0,00 0,070 0,00 -0,070 0,00 0,070 0,00 0,000 0,00 0,00 Press operator key. Tare value is displayed. Remove empty container from scale. Press Tare key . The tare display is deleted. The tare value is saved under operator key . Save tare value entered F13 1 The input field is displayed. Enter tare value, e.g. 0.070kg. Press tare key . Oper. 0,000 Press tare key . The tare display is deleted. The tare value is saved under operator key . 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 23 Operation Operating instruction BC II Call up operator tare saved Scale is unloaded and in untared condition. F13 Press. ”Oper.” is displayed. 1 6 - 24 0,00 0,00 0,00 0,070 0,00 Press operator key. The saved tare value is displayed. 6 Op. 0,000 -0,070 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.13 Operation Assisted sales with ticket Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode - Pr 510/ 02 -0 Ticket layout Set the ticket paper at the label printer - Pr 510/ 04 -0 Ticket paper Example: Operator 1 sells various articles that are programmed in the scale, cancels the last article sold and concludes the sale with the total. Apply article on scale Tab 1 Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key e.g. . 1 Register article on 1 . 1 Remove product from the scale. 2 ! @ 2 Call up next article (hand), e.g. . 3 1 Register article on 3 Call up next article (minus), '' 2 . 4 e.g. . 1 Register article on 3 . Fig. 35: Print example St Open cancellation function. 1 Press operator key St Confirm cancellation Last item is canceled 4 . Open total printing. 1 Press operator key. Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed, see printing example. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 25 6 Operation 6.14 Operating instruction BC II Talon The talon includes the number of items and the total. It helps the operator check everything later. The talon is automatically printed after the total printout. A delay of between 1 and 99 seconds can occur. The delay can be interrupted by pressing the key. The talon is then printed immediately. Menu setting - Pr 520/ 06 -01 up to 99 seconds delay in printing 6 1 Ticket counter 2 Operator number 3 Total 4 No. of items 1 2 4 3 Fig. 36: Talon example 6.15 Print ticket upon request In multi-operation mode the ticket printout can be triggered after sales process is finished, if requested. If the key combination and is not pressed, the total occurs only in the display. Menu setting - Pr 520/ 11 -0 Print ticket only upon request Operating procedure: Ticket printing upon request Apply article on scale Tab Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key 1 e.g. . Calf liver paté NET 0,498 12,55 0.002 6,25 Register article on . 1 Press Total Press operator key. 1 6,25 The total is displayed. On request: + 1 Shift and press then operator key . The ticket is printed. 6 - 26 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.16 Operation Repeat ticket Menu setting - Pr 520/ 07 -1 with -Repeat ticket- The complete and printed ticket can be printed again. Prerequisite - Ticket completion with and operator key e.g. . 2 + 1 6 1 Press and hold . Then press operator key 1 A copy is printed. You can tell the copy from the original by the asterisk 1 after the ticket number 2 . Fig. 37: Repeat ticket 6.17 Open ticket again Menu setting - Pr 520/ 08 -1 with -Re-open ticket- If the customer requires further items after printout of the ticket, a completed ticket can be re-opened. There are 2 ways of opening a ticket again. - Open the last ticket via the operator key. Open a ticket via the ticket number 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 27 Operation 6.17.1 Operating instruction BC II Open the last ticket via the operator key. Prerequisite - Ticket completion with and operator key e.g. . Open the last ticket: Ctrl + Press and hold . Then ____ press . 6 Press operator key e.g. 1 OP1<.> [1] 0,000 0,00 0,00 The last ticket is now open. Additional articles may now be sold. Finalize the re-opened ticket: Press . Press . 1 Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed. 6.17.2 Open the ticket via ticket number Open ticket again: Ctrl + Press and hold . Then press . ____ Enter the ticket number<8> ___8 press [1] 0,000 0,00 0,00 Ticket no. 8 is open again. The operator number is shown in the display. Additional articles can be sold via the displayed operator number. Finalize the re-opened ticket: Press . 1 Press e.g.. Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed. 6 - 28 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.17.3 Operation Overwrite VAT from PLU A VAT rate is assigned to PLU. If PLU is called up, a different VAT rate can be assigned to the PLU with the VAT key. Prerequisite - Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 20 -1 The PLU is assigned to a VAT rate number from 1-5. - Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 -1 The VAT can be overwritten. - Pr630 The VAT key can be found on the keyboard. - Pr631/ 03 re-programmed keyboard is set 6 Operating procedure: Apply article on scale Tab 1 Call up article with PLU direct key, e. g. with VAT number 1 (19%) II Press VAT key, e. g. with VAT number 2 (7%) 1 Register article on . Article is registered with 7% VAT Press 1 Press operator key. The ticket is printed. After VAT from PLU is assigned to article. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 29 Operation 6.18 Operating instruction BC II Serviced selling with label layout Menu setting - Pr 510/ 01 - Pr 510/ 02 - Pr 510/ 03 - Pr 520/ 02 6 -01 -1 -1 -2 Multi-operator mode Label layout with addition of customer total Only print article label Example: Operator sells different articles that are programmed in the scales, and cancels the article last sold. Place article on the scale. Tab Call up article (weighed) via PLU direct key 1 e.g. . Register article on . 1 The label is printed immediately. Remove article from the scale. ! @ Call up next article (hand), 2 e.g. . Register article on . 1 The label is printed immediately. '' 3 Call up next article (minus), e.g. . 1 Register article on . The label is printed immediately. St Open cancellation function. 1 Press operator key. Cancel St Last item is canceled. No label is printed for a cancellation. Display total 1 Press and operator e.g. in sequence. The total is displayed. No total label is printed. 6 - 30 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation By-Count 6.19 By Count article _______________________________________________________________________ The By Count article type must be put into operation, see page 7 - 33. _______________________________________________________________________ Sell By Count article Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -3 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 Unit price input (price per package) By Count article type Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece is printed on label) Operating procedure $ 4 Call up by-count article via PLU direct key e.g. . 1 Press operator key. Smoked sausage 3 1,50 The label with the package price 1 and the price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2 1 Fig. 38: By Count label (1) 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 31 6 Operation Operating instruction BC II By-Count By Count with mandatory input of number of pieces The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. The package price is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - Pr 110/ 16 -1 Article type by-count (price per package in relation to Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece) with mandatory input 6 Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces $ 4 Call up by-count article via PLU direct key e.g. . Input of number of pieces is required Smoked sausage Quantity 3 3 1,50 1,50 Enter number of pieces, e.g. <5> The new number of pieces per package and the calculated package price are displayed. 1 Quantity 5 2,50 Press operator key. The label with the new package price 1 and the price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2 1 Fig. 39: By Count label (2) 6 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation By-Count By Count with overwriting of package price The set package price can be overwritten. The price per piece is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - PR 110/ 06 -1 Article type by-count (price per package in relation to Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece) Price overwrite permitted 6 Operating procedure with overwriting of package price $ Call up by-count article via PLU 4 direct key e.g.  . Press The package price is set to ”0.00” Enter new package price e.g.5.00 Smoked sausage 3 1,50 Smoked sausage 3 0,00 Smoked sausage 3 5,00 Press operator key. 1 The label with the new package price 1 and the price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2 1 Fig. 40: By Count label (3) 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 33 Operation Operating instruction BC II By-Count By Count with overwriting of package price and number of pieces The stored package price is overwritten. This changes the price per piece. The stored number of pieces per package is then overwritten. The package price and the price per piece are recalculated. 6 Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - PR 110/ 06 -1 Article type by-count (price per package in relation to Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece) Price overwrite permitted Operating procedure with overwriting of package price and number of pieces $ 4 Call up by-count article via PLU direct key e.g.  . Press The package price is set to ”0.00” Enter new package price e.g.<5.00> Smoked sausage 3 1,50 Smoked sausage 3 0,00 Smoked sausage 3 5,00 Smoked sausage 0 5,00 Smoked sausage 5 8,33 Press key The number of pieces is set to ”0” Enter number of pieces, e.g<5> The new number of pieces and the calculated package price are displayed. 1 Press operator key. The label with the calculated package price 1 and the calculated price per piece 2 is printed. The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2 1 Fig. 41: By Count label (4) 6 - 34 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation By-Count By Count with overwriting of number of pieces and package price The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. This changes the package price. The final package price is then entered. The price per piece is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 number of pieces) - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - PR 110/ 15 -1 - PR 110/ 06 -1 Article type by-count (price per package in relation to Number of pieces per package with back calculation (price per piece) Price overwrite permitted 6 Operating procedure with overwriting of number of pieces and package price $ Call up by-count article via PLU 4 direct key e.g.  . Smoked sausage 3 1,50 Smoked sausage 0 1,50 Smoked sausage 5 2,50 Smoked sausage 5 0,00 Smoked sausage 5 0,75 Press key The number of pieces is set to ”0”. Enter number of pieces, e.g<5> The package price changes. Press The package price is set to ”0.00” Enter new package price e.g.<0.75> 1 Press operator key. The label with the entered final package price 1 and the calculated price per piece is printed. 2 The price per piece is not printed on the ticket. 2 1 Fig. 42: By Count label (5) 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 35 Operation Operating instruction BC II Fixed weight 6.20 Fixed weight The stored fixed weight of the article is used for price calculation instead of the weighed weight. _______________________________________________________________________ The fixed weight article type must be put into operation like the By Count article type, see page 7 - 33. _______________________________________________________________________ 6 Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/PLU no./17 Unit price input (price per fixed weight) Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article) Operating procedure F 22 Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key e.g. . 1 Tin of sausage 0,125 2,20 Press operator key. The ticket with selling price fixed weight is printed. 2 1 0,28 and 2 1 Fig. 43: Fixed weight (1) Fixed weight with mandatory input The fixed weight must always be entered in the sale. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01 Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 6 - 36 Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib with mandatory input of fixed weight 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation Fixed weight Operating procedure with mandatory input of fixed weight F Call up fixed weight article via 22 PLU direct key e.g.. Tin of sausage 0,125 220 Fixed weight input is required. Fixed weight 0,000 Enter new fixed weights, Fixed weight 0,150 e.g<0150>. 0,28 6 Press key. The new fixed weight and the calculated selling price are displayed. Tin of sausage 0,150 220 0,33 Press operator key. 1 The new fixed weight 1 and the selling price 2 are printed. 1 2 Fig. 44: Fixed weight (2) Fixed weight with overwriting of unit price The stored unit price can be overwritten. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01 Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/PLU no./17 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 6.111.98.5.01.18 Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article) Price overwriting permissible 6 - 37 Operation Operating instruction BC II Fixed weight Operating procedure for fixed weight with unit price overwrite The selling price is determined with the new unit price and the stored fixed weight. F 22 Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key e.g.. Press 6 The price is set to ”0.00”. Enter new unit price, e.g.<200>. 1 Tin of sausage 0,125 2,20 0,28 Tin of sausage 0,125 0,00 0,00 Tin of sausage 0,125 2,00 0,25 Press operator key. The new unit price  2 and the calculated selling price 1 are printed. 2 1 Fig. 45: Fixed weight (3) Change fixed weight Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01 Unit price input - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 - Pr 110/PLU no./17 6 - 38 Type fixed weighed Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article) 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation Fixed weight Operating procedure for changing fixed weight F Call up fixed weight article via 22 PLU direct key e.g.. Tin of sausage 0,125 2,20 0,28 Press . The selling price disappears and the fixed weight is set to ”0.000”. Enter new fixed weight, e.g<0150>. Tin of sausage 0,000 2,20 6 Tin of sausage 0,500 2,20 1,10 The calculated selling price is displayed. Press operator key. 1 The new fixed weight 1 and the calculated selling price 2 are printed. 1 2 Fig. 46: Fixed weight (4) 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 39 Operation Operating instruction BC II By Count fixed weight 6.21 By Count fixed weight In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight. Sell By Count fixed weight article 6 Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 07-5 By Count fixed weight article type (fixed weight and price refer to pieces per package) - Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package - Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) Operating procedure D 21 Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU direct key, e.g. . 1 Tin of sausage 0,250 3 2,10 Press operator key. 1 Fixed weight are printed. 1 and selling price 2 2 Fig. 47: By Count fixed weight (1) 6 - 40 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation By Count fixed weight By Count fixed weight with mandatory input The stored fixed weight per package must be overwritten. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 - Pr 110/ 19-1 Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight article type Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) with mandatory input of fixed weight 6 Operating procedure for By Count fixed weight with mandatory input D Call By Count fixed weight article 21 via PLU direct key, e.g. . Fixed weight input is required. Tin of sausage 0,250 3 2,10 Fixed weight 0,000 Enter new fixed weight, e.g<0500> g. Fixed weight 0,500 Press key. The selling price remains the same. The price per kg changes but is not displayed. 1 Tin of sausage 0,500 3 2,10 Press operator key. 2 The altered price per kg  1 and the new fixed weight 2 are printed. 1 Fig. 48: By Count fixed weight (2) 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 41 Operation Operating instruction BC II By Count fixed weight Change number of pieces Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 6 Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight type Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) Operating procedure for changing the number of pieces D 21 Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU direct key, e.g. . Tin of sausage 0,250 3 2,10 Tin of sausage 0,250 0 2,10 Tin of sausage 0,417 5 3,50 Press . The number of pieces is set to ”0”. Enter number of pieces, e.g<5> The calculated selling price and the new fixed weight are displayed immediately. 1 Press operator key. 1 The new fixed weight 1 and the calculated selling price 2 are printed. 2 Fig. 49: By Count fixed weight (3) 6 - 42 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Operation By Count fixed weight By Count fixed weight with mandatory input of number of pieces The stored number of pieces per package must be overwritten. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 - Pr 110/ 16-1 Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight type Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) with mandatory input of number of pieces 6 Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces D Call By Count fixed weight article 21 via PLU direct key, e.g. . Input of number of pieces is required Tin of sausage 0,250 3 2,10 Number of pieces 0,250 3 2,10 Number of pieces 0,583 7 4,90 Enter number of pieces, e.g<7> The calculated selling price and the new fixed weight are displayed immediately. 1 Press operator key. The new package price 1 and the number of pieces  2 are printed. 2 1 Fig. 50: By Count fixed weight (5) 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 43 Operation Operating instruction BC II By Count fixed weight By Count fixed weight with overwriting of the package price The set package price can be overwritten. The price per kg is recalculated. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -5 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) - Pr 110/ 17 - Pr 110/ 06 -1 6 Unit price input (price per package) By Count fixed weight article type Number of pieces per package Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) Price overwrite permissible Operating procedure with overwriting of package price D 21 Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU direct key, e.g. . Tin of sausage 0,250 3 2,10 Tin of sausage 0,250 3 0,00 Tin of sausage 0,250 3 5,00 Press The package price is set to ”0.00”. Enter new package price e.g.<500> 1 Press operator key. The new package price 1 and the new kg price 2 are printed. 2 1 Fig. 51: By Count fixed weight (4) 6 - 44 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.22 Operation Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out Menu setting - Pr 520/ 04 - Pr 520/ 05 - Pr 550/ 12 -1 Cash register function Payment in/out Print out amount paid in/due on ticket Operating procedure Record the article. Press . 6 Op. [1] 0,00 1 Press the operator key, e.g. . Total * [1] 2,71 The customer pays the exact amount If exact amount, close sales with total key. Payment out * [1] 0,00 The ticket is printed and the cash drawer opens. Customer pays, for example with 5.00 € Enter the amount. Payment in * [1] 5,00 Delete the incorrect entry with and enter the amount again. Payment out [1] * Save input. 2,29 The ticket is printed, the cash drawer opens and the change is indicated. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 45 Operation 6.23 Operating instruction BC II Product with data of origin When selling beef, for example, the customer should be provided with information on origin, rearing, place of slaughter and possibly breed. The beef is marked with a traceability number, which is entered when sold. Traceability data is printed on the ticket or label for the serviced selling mode and price labeling. 6 The weight of the sold meat and the number of items are saved in the traceability data sales report. There are two possible operating procedures for products with data of origin: - Input traceability no. manually. Use defined traceability no. 6.23.1 Sale with manual input of the traceability number Prerequisite Traceability texts have to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no. 10. PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 - Pr 515/ 03 - 1 with traceability number Input traceability no. manually Operating procedure Place the beef, for example, on the scales. Tab 1 Press the PLU direct key e.g. (beef). If the product contains traceability data, the weight, unit price and selling price are only displayed briefly. 0,206 A prompt to input the abbreviated traceability number then appears. 12,55 2,59 12,55 2,59 __ Enter the traceability number, e.g. 02. 02 Traceability number 02 corresponds to PLU number 9902. Confirm the entry. The weight, unit price and selling are are displayed again. 1 6 - 46 0,206 Registerfor example at Operator 1 . 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 6.23.2 Operation Sale with fixed traceability number. Prerequisite A traceability text has to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no./10. PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 - Pr 515/ 04 - 00-99 - Pr 515/ 03 - 2 with traceability number Define traceability number Use defined traceability no. 6 All products (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text from the set traceability number. Operating procedure Place the beef, for example, on the scales. Tab 1 Press the PLU direct key e.g. (beef). If the product includes traceability data, the set traceability number is automatically processed. The weight, unit and selling price are displayed. The traceability numbers is not displayed. 1 Registerfor example at Operator 1 . The sold quantity is booked separately in the traceability data sales report. 6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 47 Operation Operating instruction BC II 6 6 - 48 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 7 Programming Programming Menus marked with an asteriks *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all country versions. 7.1 Initial display If the display is assigned, press . 1 Net weight display 2 Unit price display 3 Selling price display 1 2 0,000 0,00 kg T kg Price/kg 3 7 0,00 Price Fig. 52: Initial display 7.2 Menu password No password The device is supplied without a password. Menu call-up is carried out with having to enter a password. PASS ______ With password Activate password entry, see Pr 690 on page 7 - 159. Once the password input has been activated, a correct password has to be entered. The password consists of 6 figures. PASS An symbol appears in the display for each figure that is entered. If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7-1 Programming 7.3 Operating instruction BC II Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu Menu is called up from the scales' initial display. General programming sequence 1. Menu call-up Press the key. 2. Menu selection Enter the program number via the 10-key keypad. Menu text is displayed. Confirm via the key. 3. Submenu selection Enter the submenu number or scroll to submenu using the arrow keys and confirm by pressing . 4. Make settings Confirm settings with key. 5. Exit menu Press the key. 7 Example: Menu call-up Mod Pr Menu call-up Menu selection Pr115 Select menu Print PLU list The menu text is displayed. confirm PLU list: all texts 01 No. and text of first submenu item are displayed, e.g. 01 Submenu selection Enter submenu no., e.g. 02 PLU list: only one text 02 or Scroll in menu using arrow keys. confirm 7-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Make settings Enter beginning of range, PLU list: only one text 02 ____11-999999 e.g. PLU No. 11 confirm Enter end of range PLU list: only one text 02 000011-____25 e.g. PLU No.25 confirm 7 The list, from PLU no. 11 to PLU no. 25, is printed. Exit menu Mod Exit menu. The scale returns to the initial display. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7-3 Programming Operating instruction BC II Input correction Error inputs can be undone by pressing key . Press key to go to previous level, the old values remain intact. Key to clear entry. Esc Use key to go to previous level. _______________________________________________________________________ If single items were registered and no total has been created, it is not possible to switch to the programming mode. 7 The operator accounts have to be closed. _______________________________________________________________________ 7.4 Initial scale setting Set the type of paper to be used. Pr Call up menu Pr505 Select menu 1 Pr505 Select type of paper 0= Ticket paper 1= Label paper (only possible for label printer) 0 confirm Set the desired main operating mode. Set main operating mode and print layout in menu Pr510, see page 7 - 87 and 7 - 111. e.g. setting multi-operating mode and ticket layout Design ticket Set paper type Pr510/01 -01 Pr 510/ 02-0 Pr 550, see page 7 - 111 Pr 510/ 04, see page 7 - 88. Set the required switching operation mode. Set switching operation mode and print layout in menu Pr511, see page 7 - 89 and 7 - 118. e.g. setting multi-operating mode and label layout Design label Set paper type 7-4 Pr511/01 -01 Pr 511/ 02-1 Pr 555, see page 7 - 118 Pr 511/ 04, see page 7 - 90. 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 7.5 Programming Overview of list Requirement - Insert the ticket paper for scales with a label printer. - Pr 510/ 04 -0 Select ticket paper 7.5.1 PLU article print, see Pr 115, page 7 - 53 Create see Pr 110, on page7 - 42 1 Scale number 2 Unit price 3 Tare 11 1 4 10 2 5 Article with data of origin Price overwriting permissible 6 PLU text 7 Shelf-life days 8 Barcode 9 Product group number 10 PLU number / article number 11 Date and time 9 8 7 3 4 6 5 Fig. 53: Article list 7.5.2 Header and footer texts print, see Pr 205/ 02 on page 7 - 58 Create see Pr 201, on page7 - 56 1 Scale number 2 Enter header or footer text 3 Text number 4 Date and time 4 1 3 2 Fig. 54: Header and footer text list 6.111.98.5.01.18 7-5 7 Programming 7.5.3 Operating instruction BC II Additional texts see Pr 205/ 01 on page 7 - 58 Create see Pr 200, on page7 - 55 1 Scale number 2 Supplement. text 3 Text number 4 Date and time 4 3 7 2 1 Fig. 55: Suppl. text list 7.5.4 Scrolling message Print, see Pr 205/ 03 Create see Pr 202, 1 Scale no 2 Scrolling message text 3 Scrolling message number 4 Date and time page 7 - 58 on page7 - 57 4 3 1 2 Fig. 56: Scrolling message list 7.5.5 PLU direct keys 1 print, see Pr 536, page 7 - 107 change see Pr 535 on page 7 - 104 PLU number (article no.) 2 PLU direct key 2 1 Fig. 57: PLU direct keys 7-6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 7.5.6 Programming Barcode structure , see Pr 211, Create see Pr 210, 1 Structure number 2 Barcode format 3 Field 1 code constant 4 5 Content field 1 Field 2 part string from PLU 6 No. of digits for field 2 7 Field 3 price 8 No. of digits for field 3 9 Conversion of variable values page7 - 65 on page7 - 61 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 8 9 Fig. 58: Barcode structures 7.5.7 BLD labels BLD= Bizerba Label Designer. Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts. Printout of BLD label numbers. Print list, see Pr 220/01, see page7 - 71 Delete list, see Pr 225/01, see page 7 - 71. Create layout with BLD. Example of BLD label see page 7 - 119. 1 Scale number 2 Label name (enter in BLD) 3 Label name (enter in BLD) 4 Date and time 4 3 2 1 Fig. 59: Example of BLD label list 6.111.98.5.01.18 7-7 Programming 7.5.8 Operating instruction BC II Logos Printout of logo saved in the scales. _______________________________________________________________________ Logos can be designed in the BLD. The BLD logos are given a number and sent to the scales where they are stored. If a logo exists in the scales with the same number, the existing logo is replaced by the BLD logo. If this BLD logo is deleted in the scales (Pr 225/02) the previous logo stored under this number is available again. 7 _______________________________________________________________________ Print, see Pr 220/ 02 on page 7 - 71 Delete see Pr 225/02, see page 7 - 72 1 Scale number 2 Logo name 3 Logo 4 Logo ID Date and time 5 5 1 4 2 3 Fig. 60: Example of logo list 7-8 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 7.5.9 Programming VAT rates Printing saved VAT rates. Print see Pr 231/ 01 on page 7 - 74 Delete see Pr 231/02, see page 7 - 74 Create see Pr 230, on page7 - 72 1 VAT number 2 VAT rate 3 VAT text 4 Including or excluding VAT 1 7 2 3 6.111.98.5.01.18 4 7-9 Programming 7.6 Operating instruction BC II General procedure for text input Texts are entered in the program menus: Pr 200 supplementary text, 7 - Pr 201 header and footer texts - PR 202 scrolling message - Pr110/ PLU no. / 10 PLU article texts 1 Font type 2 Line number (line 1) 3 Available memory space (in byte) Pr200 C 1500 LI H3 2 1 Fig. 61: Example of display Font H HThe font is determined by the selected layout (ticket or label) H15 The font type is 15 (Script 15). Change font Clr + 1 Press and hold . Then press <0>. Enter the font, e.g.15 Press key. l H1 _15_ ^15;I C 1496 The font is now Script 15. Also for the following lines L1 H 15 _______________________________________________________________________ The font can be changed any time. Within the text of a line or in the next line. The last font set applies until the next change. _______________________________________________________________________ The overview of font types (script) in the scale can be printed out via Pr 702. Fig. 62: Font 4-9 7 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Change line Programming 2 CR Press key for the next 45 Pr200 C 1499 L2 H15 line. Change up and down between existing lines. Save entry Pr200 Press key. C 1499 L2 H15 7 Keys with alpha and special characters Lower case is generally selected by pressing the key. Character a: A Press key<19>. 19 Character A: A + 19 Press and hold key , then press key <19>. If there are 2 characters on a key, these must be called up as follows: Character ß: ß? Press key<39>. 39 Character ?: Ctrl ß? + 39 Press and hold key . then press key<39>. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 11 Programming Operating instruction BC II Special character: Example of decimal input of unicode characters. Character I: Pr200 C 1500 LI H- Ctrl + Press and hold . then press <4>. l UCd _____ UCd __8364 Press the decimal figures for the unicode for the desired character. 7 l | Confirm with . C 1498 LI H- Enter example of hex value input. Character I: Pr200 C 1500 LI H- Ctrl + Press and hold . then press <2>. A C 19 30 7 - 12 l UCH ____ requested character. UCH _20Ac Confirm with . | Enter the hex value for the l C 1498 LI H- 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming CTRL Sequences in the editor 1 Shortcuts Function CTRL + 0 Change font CTRL + 1 Activate and deactivate Pinyin mode Only for Chinese program and dot seven display. 1 CTRL + 2 Enter Unicode hexadecimal number CTRL + 3 GB 3212 mode Only for Chinese program CTRL + 4 Enter Unicode decimal number 7 In Pinyin Mode there is an automatic switching in the Pinyin input, if a character A to Z is selected in the Editor. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 13 Programming Operating instruction BC II Function keys of text input delete final character Delete line 8 Move cursor in text to the left or right 9 7 Control printout of current text line Control printout of all text lines Text example Enter article text, e.g.: Raclètte cheese R + 13 R A C L 19 30 27 Ctrl + acl è T T E 14 14 12 SP tte Space 44 K + 26 E Ä S 41 20 12 K Cheese Control printout: Raclètte cheese 7 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 7.7 Programming Overview of scrolling messages Define scrolling message text Define in Pr 202 Pr202 01 Select 202 Scrolling message for text number input Pr202 02 01-99 l Press key. 7 C 500 LI H- Scrolling message for text input, e.g. ”&Z, You are being served by &B04; Mr. Müller” For text input, see page 7 - 10. Control characters: &Z;= Display character-by-character - &W;= Display word-by-word (standard) - &Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.) - &Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.) _______________________________________________________________________ To control the text, the control characters must be entered in front of the text and concluded with a <; > semicolon. The control characters can be entered at any point between the text. _______________________________________________________________________ Scrolling message Menu setting - Pr 516/ 01 -01 Select scrolling text number. - Select display location e.g. 2= Scrolling message on operator - - Pr 516/ 02 -2 and customer side or Pr 516/ 02 -1 side or Pr 516/ 02 -0 customer side Pr 516/ 03 -1 6.111.98.5.01.18 Select display location e. g. 1= Scrolling message on operator Select display location e. g. 0= Scrolling message on Scrolling message starts with empty display 7 - 15 Programming Operating instruction BC II Barcode 7.8 Barcode overview Procedure: 1. Create barcode structure - Pr 210 Enter structure number Pr 210/ 01 Define barcode format (EAN 13, code 128 or EAN 8) Pr 210/ 02 Enter constant - Pr 210/03 Define numeric value _______________________________________________________________________ 7 If several numeric values are defined for a barcode, Menu Pr 210/ 03 must be called up again for each value. Only press numeric key <3> and confirm with . _______________________________________________________________________ - Pr 210/ 03 Define another numeric value Pr210/ 04 Save structure Example Structure number (Pr 210), code format (Pr 210/ 01) and constant ( Pr 210/ 02) are entered. Further operating procedure for numeric value input: Pr210 03 01040 Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 01040 (price) Pr210 04 Confirm input Confirm submenu 03 Submenu 4 is displayed Presskey <3> Select submenu 03 again Pr210 03 Pr210 03 12030 Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 12030 (department no.) Confirm submenu 03 Confirm input Submenu 4 is displayed Confirm submenu 04 Pr210 04 l 04 C 291 L11 H- Save code structure The code structure is checked and adopted if valid. If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure must be re-entered from the beginning. 7 - 16 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Manufacturer code EAN 13 2. Release barcode printing Ticket - Pr 550/ 01 Release barcode print on ticket for product, total and talon. - Pr 550/ 02 Define barcode height 5-22 mm. Label - Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print on label for article, total. - Pr 555/ 07 Define barcode height 5-22 mm. 3. Allocate barcode The barcode can be produced for the following data: Articles not saved in the scales: - Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215/02 - Non-PLU non-weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/03 - Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/ 04 - Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 /05 7 Articles saved in the scales: - Article (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/PLU no./ 05 - For all articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211/ 03 Barcode types: Manufacturer code EAN 13 see page 7 - 18 The manufacturer barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the article, e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04. Instore EAN 13 / EAN 8 see page 7 - 20 A code structure must be created for EAN 13 and EAN 8. Create in Pr 210. Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an articele in Pr110/PLU no/05 or all articles in Pr 211 /03. The EAN 13 printout has 13 digits (12 digits for information and one check digit) The EAN 8 printout has 8 digits (7 digits for information and one check digit) Code 128 see page 7 - 26 A code structure must be defined for code 128. Creation in Pr210. The code structure number from Pr210 is, e.g., assigned to an article in Pr110/05 or to all articles in Pr211 /03. The code 128 printout can be any width. The barcode is limited by the possible printing area. Manufacturer code EAN 8 see page 7 - 19 The manufacturer barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the article, e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 17 Programming Operating instruction BC II Manufacturer code EAN 13 Manufacturer code EAN 13 13 digits have to be entered for the EAN 13 manufacturer code. Enter numbers 1400151300062. 1 The first digit 1 identifies the entry as the manufacturer code and is not printed. Code digit for code format 1= manufacturer code 1 Pr110 05 2 1 400151300062 Fig. 63: Entering the manufacturer code 7 The following 12 digits are converted into a barcode and are printed as they are entered 2 . The last digit is a check digit created by the scale 3 . 3 2 Fig. 64: Print manufacturer code _______________________________________________________________________ There are different types of barcode. One of the most common barcodes is the 13-digit code for consumer articles. The following example shows how the barcode is broken down: Country digit Manufacturer number Article number Check digit - The country digit indicates in which country a manufacturer has applied for the barcode. The numbers 400 to 440, for example, stand for Germany. - The manufacturer number provides information on the producer and is issued by GS1 Germany. - The article number is specified by the manufacturer. Each article has its own number and can therefore be identified worldwide. - The check digit is a number that has been calculated from all the other digits. It helps to avoid reading errors in the scanner. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 18 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Manufacturer code EAN 8 Manufacturer code EAN 8 8 digits have to be entered for the EAN 13 manufacturer code. 1st digit = code format Digits 2 to 8 = barcode digits Digits 9 to 13 = fill with zeros. Enter numbers 2400151200000. 1 The first digit 1 identifies the entry as the manufacturer code and is not printed. Code digit for code format 2= Manufacturer code EAN 8 1 Pr110 05 2 2 400151200000 7 Fig. 65: Entering the manufacturer code The following 7 digits are converted into a barcode and are printed as they are entered 2 . The last digit is a check digit created by the scale 3 . 2 3 Fig. 66: Printout manufacturer code EAN 8 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 19 Programming Operating instruction BC II Instore code EAN 13 Instore code EAN 13 A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code. The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. The number of digits per field is also defined in the structure. Menu setting - Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03 - Pr 210/ 04 7 Create structure Check and save structure 12 digits must be defined for EAN 13. The number of available 12 digits is divided into fields in the barcode structure. Each field can be set individually in Pr210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The fields are counted from left to right. _______________________________________________________________________ Several encoded values (fields) can be set in a row, to do so re-access submenu 02 or 03 . The number of digits in all fields must be exactly 12. If this is more or less, the structure is rejected. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 20 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Instore code EAN 13 Example: Code structure for in-store code EAN 13 with 3 fields 12 digits are available for printing. The 13th digit is a check number from the scale. 1 2 3 7 Fig. 67: Code digit (Field 1), Substring/Constant (Field 2), Selling Price (Field 3) Menu Input example Note Printing in field Pr 210 02 Code structure number Use this structure number in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 05 or Pr 211/ 03 Pr 215/ 02 Pr 215/ 03 Pr 215/ 04 Pr 215/ 05 Pr 210/ 01 00002 Code EAN 13 with OCR Pr 210/ 02 22 Code digit for price 2 Digits Field 1 (code digit) Pr 210/ 03 05040 Substring/Constant 4 Digits Enter field 2 (sub‐ string) in Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 or Pr 215/ 02 Pr 215/ 03 Pr 215/ 04 Pr 215/ 05 Pr 210/ 03 01060 Selling price 6 Digits Field 3 (Price) Pr 210/ 04 6.111.98.5.01.18 Check and save struc‐ ture 7 - 21 Programming Operating instruction BC II Instore code EAN 13 Example: Create barcode structure in Pr210 The following in-store barcode is to be printed: Code digits price in Euro (22), substring from PLU (0815), price (total). 1 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02 Pr210 02 1 7 Define barcode format Submenu 01 Pr210 2 Barcode types 01 10002 0= EAN 13; 1= code 128; 2= EAN 8 2 3 4 3 Height of barcode 00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02, Pr555/07 or from BLD layout. 4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed. 5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel Define code digits (Field 1) Submenu 02 (code constant) 5 e.g. 22 for price code in Euro according to GS1 Germany 5 5 22 02 C 18 LI H- Define substring (Field 2) Submenu 03 (numeric code) Pr210 6 Numeric code 03 05040 05= Substring from e.g. 110/05 (PLU): 6 7 8 or 215/ 02 (Non-PLU weighed) or 215/ 03 (Non-weighed articles) or 215/ 04 (Minus articles) or 215/ 05 (Total) 7 Number of digits for field 2 04= four digits for constant 8 Conversion of variable values 0=If in ”Numeric code” <05>= part string was selected, <0> must always be enetered for the ”conversion of the variable values”. 7 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Instore code EAN 13 Define price barcode (Field 3) Submenu 03 (Numeric code) 9 Numeric code (encoded value) 01= price 10 Number of digits for field 3 06= 6 digits for the price 11 Conversion of variable values 0= Decimal places as per device setting Pr210 03 01060 9 Check and adopt code structure Confirm submenu 04 10 11 Pr210 04 C 302 L11 confirm 7 H- Assign instore code code structure e.g in Pr 215/ 05 (total) 12 Code digit for barcode type 0= Instore code 13 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02 The code structure is saved in Pr 210 under this number. 14 Constant is freely selectable e.g. 4-digit article no. ”0815” The number of digits depends on the number of digits for the part string 7 . 15 The remaining digits are without meaning, but must be assigned. Input: ”000000” 16 Scale check digit 12 13 14 15 Pr215 05 0 02 0815000000 5 14 15 16 Fig. 68: Printout example for instore code EAN 13 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 23 Programming Operating instruction BC II Instore code EAN 13 Example: Pr110 In-store code for a PLU no. 05 0 02 0815 000000 Printing of the barcode depends on the setting in the barcode structure. 6-digit coded value without check digit 7 5 Field 1: 2 digits for code constant e.g. 22 for price code in Euro 7 Field 2: 4 digits for part string e.g. article number 0815 10 Field 3: 6 digits for coded value e.g. price 0022, 14€ 16 Scale check digit 5 7 10 16 Fig. 69: Example of EAN 13 in-store code without check digit 5 digit coded value with check digit 5 Field 1: 2 digits for code constant e.g. 22 for price code in Euro 7 Field 2: 4 digits for part string e.g. article number 0815 17 Field 3:1 digit check digit for encoded value 10 Field 4: 5 digits for coded value e.g. price 022, 14€ 16 Scale check digit 5 7 17 10 16 Fig. 70: Example of EAN 13 in-store code with check digit 7 - 24 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Instore code EAN 8 Instore code EAN 8 A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code EAN 8. The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. Menu setting - Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03 - Pr 210/ 04 Create structure Check and save structure 7 digits must be defined for EAN 8. _______________________________________________________________________ The number of digits in the structure must be exactly 7. 7 If there are more or less, the structure is rejected. _______________________________________________________________________ Example: Code structure for instore code EAN 8 There are 7 digits available for printing. The 8th digit is a check digit from the scale. 1 Code digit for price 2 Selling price 3 Scale check digit 1 2 3 Fig. 71: Instore code EAN 8 Menu Pr 210 Input example 02 Pr 210/ 01 20002 Pr 210/ 02 21 Pr 210/ 03 01050 Pr 210/ 04 6.111.98.5.01.18 Note Code structure number to be used in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 05 or Pr 211/ 03 Pr 215/ 02 Non-PLU weighed Pr 215/ 03 Non-PLU non-weighed articles Pr 215/ 04 Non-PLU minus articles Pr 215/ 05 Total Code EAN 8 with OCR Code digit for price 2 Digits Selling price 5 Digits Check and save structure 7 - 25 Programming Operating instruction BC II Code 128 Code 128 Code 128 contains the information in the dashes and spaces. The dash widths and the width of the spaces vary, depending on the code content. ASCII characters from ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 can be represented. This includes the character set A, B and C. The specifications of code 128 can be found in Directive EN 799. The length of the code is variable. Menu setting - Pr 210/ structure number/ 01, 02, 03 Create code - Pr 210/ 04 Check digit and save if valid 7 The structure of Code 128 is defined in Pr 210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The code constant is defined in Pr 210/ 02. The encoded values are selected in Pr 210/ 03, see page 7 - 62. _______________________________________________________________________ Several encoded values can be set in a row, to do so re-call submenu 02 or 03. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 26 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Code 128 Example: Code structure for code 128 with 6 fields Any number of fields 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig. 72: Text (Field 1), Selling price (Field 2), PLU no. (Field 3), Weight (Field 4), Unit price (Field 5), Department number (Field 6) Menu Input example Note Printing in field Pr 210 10 Code structure number Use this structure number in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 211/ 03 Pr 215/ 02 Pr 215/ 03 Pr 215/ 04 Pr 215/ 05 Pr 210/ 01 1000 Code 128 with OCR Pr 210/ 02 ABCD Code constant Field 1 (Text) Pr 210/ 03 01040 Selling price with4 digits Field 2 (Selling price) Pr 210/ 03 06040 PLU no. with4 digits field 3 (PLU no) Pr 210/ 03 02040 Weight with4 digits Field 4 (Weight) Pr 210/ 03 08040 Unit price with4 digits Field 5 (Unit price) Pr 210/ 03 12030 Department number with3 digits Field 6 (Dept. no.) Pr 210/ 04 6.111.98.5.01.18 Check and save struc‐ ture 7 - 27 Programming Operating instruction BC II Code 128 Operating procedure: Enter the code structure no. e.g. 10 after menu access Confirm code structure no. Confirm submenu 01 Enter barcode format, e.g. 1000 7 Confirm barcode format Confirm submenu 02 Enter code constant, e.g. ABCDEF Pr 210 10 Pr210 01 Pr210 01 1000 Pr210 02 ABCDEF 02 C 14 LI H- Pr210 03 Pr210 Confirm submenu 03 03 01040 Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 01040 (price) Pr210 04 Confirm input Confirm constant Submenu 4 is displayed Select submenu 03 again Press <3> Pr210 03 Pr210 03 12030 Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion e.g. 12030 (department no.) Pr210 04 Confirm input Confirm submenu 03 Confirm submenu 04 l 04 C 291 L11 H- Confirm input The code structure is checked and adopted if valid. If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure must be re-entered from the beginning. 7 - 28 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Code 128 Example: Create structure for barcode 128 in Pr 210 The following barcode is to be printed: Text, price, PLU no., weight, unit price, department no.. 1 Barcode no. e.g. 10 Pr210 10 1 Define barcode format Submenu 01 Pr210 2 Barcode types 01 1= Code 128; 0= EAN 13; 2= EAN 8 3 Height of barcode 00= Barcode height is taken from Pr550/02 or Pr555/07. 4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed. 5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel Enter text (Field 1) Submenu 02 (code constant) 5 e.g. ABCD Price (Field 2) Submenu 03 (Numeric code) 6 Numeric code 01= price 7 Number of digits for price 04= four digits for price 8 Conversion of variable values 0= Decimal places as per device setting PLU no. (Field 3) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 06= PLU no. 7 Number of digit for PLU no. 04= four digits for PLU no. 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting 6.111.98.5.01.18 10002 2 3 4 7 5 5 ABCD 02 C 16 LI H- Pr210 03 01040 6 Pr210 03 7 8 06040 6 7 8 7 - 29 Programming Operating instruction BC II Code 128 Weight (Field 4) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 02= Weight 7 Number of digits for weight 04= four digits for weight 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting 7 Unit price (Field 5) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 08= Unit price 7 Number of digits for unit price 04= four digits for unit price 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting Department no. (Field 6) Submenu 03 (numeric code) 6 Numeric code 12= Department number 7 Number of digits for department number 03= three digits for department number 8 Conversion of variable values 0= as per device setting Check and adopt code Confirm submenu 04 confirm 7 - 30 Pr210 03 02040 6 Pr210 03 8 08040 6 Pr210 03 7 7 8 12030 6 7 8 Pr210 04 C 115 L19 H- 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Code 128 Assign barcode e.g. in Pr 110/PLU no./ 05 12 Code digit for barcode type 0= Instore code 13 Barcode no e.g. 10 The structure of Code 128 in Pr 210 is saved under this number. 15 Part string in example not used. Therefore the remaining digits are without meaning. Input: ”0000000000” 16 Scale check digit 12 Pr110 05 13 15 0 10 0000000000 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig. 73: Example of Code 128 with 6 fields 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 31 Programming 7.9 Operating instruction BC II Traceability marker Traceability text Information about the origin of a product e.g. beef is is entered into Pr 110/PLU number (9900 to 9999)/ 10. The PLU number 9900 equals traceability number 00. PLU number 9902 equals origin number 02 etc. The traceability text is saved under the manufacturer number, which is printed in addition to the PLU text. 1 Traceability text 2 7 PLU text 2 1 Fig. 74: Traceability text Traceability no. The traceability number is allocated to a product in during the sale. There are 2 types of allocation: 1. 2. Manual input of traceability number when a PLU is called up. Automatic traceability no. Program traceability data for manual input - Create text of origin Pr110/PLU number (9900- 9999)/ 10 - Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-1999)/ 09 -1 1= with data of origin - Setting traceability marker Pr 515/03 -1 1= manual traceability marker, Program traceability data for automatic traceability number - Create text of origin Pr110/PLU number (9901-9999)/ 10 - Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-9999)/ 09 -1 1= with data of origin - Setting traceability marker Pr 515/03 -2 2= automatic traceability marker, - Define automatic traceability no. PR515/04 -01 (01-99) 7 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming By-Count 7.10 Overview of By Count article definition By Count articles are piece goods in a package. The number of pieces per package is defined. By Count and fixed weight database configuration The By Count article type must be started up with Pr 606. _______________________________________________________________________ All article data are deleted during setting database configuration. 7 Back up your data before database configuration. _______________________________________________________________________ Menu setting - Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on. - Pr 606/ 08 - 81 Start database configuration The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted. By Count piece goods General settings Menu setting - Pr 515/ 08 -0 or - Pr 515/ 07 -1 goods 6.111.98.5.01.18 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16. Mandatory input number of pieces for all By Count piece 7 - 33 Programming Operating instruction BC II By-Count Create By Count piece goods in a PLU The selling price per package refers to the unit price and the set number of pieces per package. Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 07 -3 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) 7 Unit price input (price per package) By Count piece good type Number of pieces per package The price per piece is also to be printed. If back calculation is activated, the price per piece is determined and additionally printed. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -0 Without back calculation or - Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -1 Wit back calculation The price per piece is back-calculated from the package unit price and the number of pieces. The number of pieces must always be entered for the called By Count article in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of pieces or - Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -1 With mandatory input number of pieces Overwriting the selling price must be permitted in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting or - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -1 With price overwriting 7 - 34 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Fixed weight 7.11 Create overview of fixed weight The stored fixed weight for the article is used for the price calculation instead of the weighed weight. Fixed weight General settings Menu setting - Pr 515/ 08 -0 or - Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19. Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles 7 Define fixed weight in a PLU Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -1 - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Pr 110/PLU no./17 Unit price input (price per fixed weight) Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib Unit price referring to 100g or 1/4 Lib Type fixed weighed Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article) The fixed weight should always be entered for the called product in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weight or - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight Overwriting the unit price should be permitted in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 35 Programming Operating instruction BC II By Count fixed weight 7.12 Overview of By Count fixed weight In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight. By Count fixed weight General settings Menu setting Mandatory input of fixed weight - Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19. or - Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles 7 - Mandatory entry of quantity Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16. or Pr 515/ 07 -1 Piece Mandatory input for all By Count articles Define By Count fixed weight in a PLU Menu setting - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 - Pr 110/ 08 -0 or - Pr 110/ 08 -1 - Unit price input (price per package) Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 Lib Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight type Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package) The fixed weight should always be entered for the called article in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weight or - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight The number of pieces must always be entered for the called article in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of pieces or - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 16 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight Overwriting the package price must be permitted in sales. Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting or - Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting 7 - 36 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming VAT 7.13 Overview VAT VAT only for ticket and multi-user operation. If you define the VAT on the scale, please proceed as follows: 1. Switch on VAT in setting into operation, see page 7 - 145. Pr606/ 07 -111 VAT on Pr606/ 88 - 81 The values set are adopted. Re-programming of paper and mode settings (Pr510) necessary. 2. Print incl. VAT yes/no, see page 7 - 99. Pr520/ 10 -1 Print Pr520/ 10 -0 No print 3. Create VAT rates 1 to 5, see page 7 - 72. Pr230 VAT number 1-5 Pr230/ 01 Define VAT rate Pr230/ 02 0= VAT incl. 1= VAT excl. Pr230/ 03 VAT text 4. A VAT number for all articles yes/no, see page 7 - 74. Pr231/ 03 0= Use VAT from article 1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles If a VAT number (1-5) is assigned to all articles, the VAT from article is ignored. Overwriting is not possible. 5. Assign VAT to articles, see page 7 - 51. Pr110/ PLU-Nr./ 20 VAT number 1-5 Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 - 1 The VAT can be overwritten. Pr215/ 09 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles Pr215/ 10 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles Pr215/ 11 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 7 - 37 Programming Operating instruction BC II VAT 7.13.1 Assign VAT to PLU Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 - Pr 230 - Pr 231/ 03 -0 VAT is activated The VAT rate is created The VAT is used from PLU Pr Call up menu Select menu 7 Pr110 000001 The PLU number is displayed. confirm Select submenu Pr110 20 Confirm Pr110 20 1 Enter VAT number Pr110 20 2 Confirm The VAT rate from the VAT number 2 has now been assigned to PLU1. Submenu 21 is displayed. Pr110 21 confirm <1> press Pr110 21 1 The VAT in PLU can now be overwritten with a different VAT, see page 6 - 29. Exit menu 7 - 38 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 7.14 Programming Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) Up to 6 devices can be connected in a scale network (system). Two scales can be connected directly via the EDP connector. Several scales are connected with a switch. For scales with a 30 kg weighing range, please ask your Bizerba consultant. Continuous operation in system possible. With Continuous operation a ticket can be transmitted to any scale and printed in multi-operator mode. Data maintenance is also possible. Process Continuous operation Registration is done on a scale. Further registrations by the same operator can be done on all scales within the system. With key and operator key, e. g. the ticket can be closed on any scale on the system. The items and the total are then printed. The following must be observed during continuous operation: Prerequisite - All scales must run on the same program version (Pr 716 / 09). - All scales must be equipped with a dot-seven display. Menu setting - The Database configuration (Pr 606) must be set equally on all scales. - Each scale within the scale must have an own network IP address (Pr 600) All scales need to have the same Multicast address (Pr 607/ 02). All scales need to have the same port number ( Pr 607/ 03 ) ( Pr 607/ 04 ). One scale must be set as master scale (Pr 607/ 01 - 9). Only one scale must be set as master. The other scales need to be set as slaves (Pr 607/ 01 - 1). The operating mode must be set to multi-operator mode (510 /01 - 01). - _______________________________________________________________________ Scales in multi-operator and price labeling mode participate in master data supply (Pr510 01). Continuous operation cannot be run on scales in price labeling mode. Continuous operation multi-operator . is only supported in operating mode Master data maintenance only possible on master scale. Sales can only be viewed, printed and deleted on the master scale. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 39 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II System set-up During system set-up, e.g. when switching on the scales, the slave scales show the current system condition as scrolling message. The scales cannot be operated during this time. System conditions with slave scales If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling message on the display. 7 - ”Scale Network off” Scale not entered in system yet. - ”Scale Update” Update of system data running. - If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master data from master scale are stored. _______________________________________________________________________ It is absolutely necessary that you wait until all scales have been entered into the system. If one of the above mentioned messages appear on the display of a slave scale and sales is continued on the other scales at the same time, synchronization of this slave scale is re-started, this means a scale update is started again. This functionality may cause that the respective slave scales can no longer be integrated in the system network. _______________________________________________________________________ System identification If a device has been entered into the system, the arrow 1 flashes in the display . 1 0,000 - Arrow flashes = Slave scale in system. - Arrow flashes every second= master scale in system. - 0,00 0,00 Arrow is dark = stand-alone scale. 7 - 40 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Take scale out of a system A scale in the system is to run as a single scale. + Press and hold pressed, then press . ”WAIT” appears on the display and the scale starts booting. 1 0,000 0,00 0,00 _______________________________________________________________________ 7 Sales data and ticket memory are deleted. _______________________________________________________________________ The scale can be operated as stand-alone scale. If the scale is to be integrated in the system again, switch on and off scale again. The sales data and the ticket memory are cleared and overwritten with the system network data. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 41 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- 7.15 Article maintenance menu Pr 1-- Define, edit or delete article (PLU). Up to 6000 products (PLU) can be defined. _______________________________________________________________________ The number of products (PLU) depends on the settings in memory management Pr 606. Standard setting is 2000 PLU. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ 7 Define PLU Pr 110 Print article (PLU) lists Pr 115 Delete article individually Pr 120 Delete article from to Pr 121 _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 42 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Article maintenance Pr 1-- 7.15.1 Defining PLU (article) .................................................... Pr 110 All data related to an article is saved in the PLU no., e.g. text, basic price, tare, etc. Select 110 Pr110 confirm PLU product The menu text is displayed 7 confirm Index _____9 Enter PLU number (1 to 6000) confirm Scroll in submenu using arrow keys. Price 01 confirm Pr 110 Submenu overview: 01= Unit price 02= Product group 03= Tare 04= Shelf-life days 05= Barcode 06= Price overwriting 07= Article type 08= Weight class 09= Data of origin 10= PLU article text 11= Supplementary text 1 - 4 12= Supplementary text 1 - 10 for BLD text fields 13= Logo print in BLD logo fields 1-3 14= Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes 15= Unit price back calculation for the By Count operating modes 16= Mandatory input of pieces 17= Fixed weight 18= Fixed weight mode 19= Mandatory input of fixed weight 20= VAT number 21= VAT can be overwritten 22= Tare % (percentage tare) 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 43 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- Unit price input _______________________________________________________________________ The price/kg depends on the entered unit price (110/PLU no./01) and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08). _______________________________________________________________________ Example: Weight class 1kg 100g Unit price input 25.80 25.80 Price/kg 25.80 258.00 7 Submenu 01 Enter unit price Pr110 01 0025,80 save Product group Submenu 02 Enter product group Pr110 02 0001 0000-9999 product groups are possible. save Tare Submenu 03 Enter tare in gram Pr110 03 0,002 save _______________________________________________________________________ Article tare is country-dependent. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 44 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Article maintenance Pr 1-- Sell-by date The sell-by date is only printed on labels. If entry is smaller than 900 (< 900), the text ”best before” is printed on the label. With entry 900 the text ”use by” instead of ”best before” is printed, e.g. for minced meat the packaged on date and the use-by date would then be the same. With an input of 901, the use-by date is 1 day later than the packaged on date, etc.. The shelf life days are added to the packaged on date. The resulting sell-by date is printed. If ”000” is entered, no sell-by date is printed. Submenu 04 Pr110 04 900 Enter shelf-life 7 Shelf-life t 900 = Print sell-by date Shelf-life y 900 = Print use-by date save Barcode for article Prerequisite for printing the barcode, see page 7 - 16 Submenu 05 Enter 13 digits for barcode save 1 2 3 4 0= Instore code (EAN 13, EAN 8 or code 128) 1= Manufacturer code EAN 13 2= Manufacturer code EAN 8 Code structure number Pr110 05 0010815000000 1 2 3 4 Substring (free entry) is defined in Pr 210/ 03 The in-store code must be filled with 000000. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 45 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- Overwriting the price The stored unit price for an article can be changed in sales (overwritten), see page 6 - 17. Submenu 06 Pr110 06 Enter selection 0 0= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted 1= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted save 7 Article type Submenu 07 Enter article type Pr110 07 0 save Product types 0= weighed - The selling price of an article is calculated from the weight. 1= non weighed - The price does not depend on the weight. The selling price of the article is the entered unit price. 2= minus - The unit price of the article is a minus amount in sales, e.g. for deposit on bottles. Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 -11 or - Pr 606/ 07 -10 or - Pr 606/ 07 -01 - Allow By Count and fixed weight Allow By Count only Allow fixed weight only Pr 606/ 08 -81 Start commissioning The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted. _______________________________________________________________________ All article data are deleted during commissioning. Back up your data before commissioning. _______________________________________________________________________ 3= By Count - the price relates to pieces per package. 4 = Fixed weight 5=By Count fixed weight - fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package 7 - 46 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Article maintenance Pr 1-- Weight class _______________________________________________________________________ The price/kg depends on the entered unit price (110/PLU no./01) and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08). _______________________________________________________________________ Submenu 08 Pr110 08 0 Enter weight class 0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb depending on country option 1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb depending on country option 7 save Data of origin Data of origin can be allocated to a PLU no. Prerequisite - Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 10 The data, e.g. birth, slaughter, cutting, etc. has to be defined, PLU no. 9900 - 9999, see page 7 - 32. Submenu 09 Pr110 09 0 Enter selection 0= without data of origin 1= with data of origin save PLU article text Submenu 10 Pr110 10 C 500 LI H- Enter article text Example: S A L A M I 20 19 27 19 34 17 Enter PLU article text, see also page7 - 10. Start test print ”salami” is printed save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 47 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- Supplementary text 1-4 Prerequisite Ticket - Pr 550/ 13 -1 - Release print of supplementary texts. Label Pr 555/ 16 -______1 Release print of supplementary texts. 1 to 4 supplementary texts can be printed in addition to the PLU article text. The supplementary texts have to be available in Pr 200. 7 Submenu 11 Pr110 11 _-_________ Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 Pr110 11 1-000000000 confirm Pr110 11 1-_________ Enter text number from Pr 200 Pr110 11 1-______ 101 confirm Supplementary text 1-10 for BLD text fields BLD= Bizerba Label Designer Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts. In the design of labels in BLD, different text fields can be defined. A text from Pr 200 can allocated to these text fields in the scales. Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 01 -00 Label layout from BLD. - Pr 555/02 -09 select BLD label number - Pr 606/ 03 -0 to 10 Release BLD text fields Submenu 12 Enter text feld number 1-10 confirm Enter text number from Pr200 Pr110 12 __-_________ Pr110 12 01-000000000 Pr110 12 01- 000000101 confirm The text no. 101 in Pr 200 is allocated to text field 1. 7 - 48 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Article maintenance Pr 1-- Logo print in BLD logo fields Graphic fields can be defined in BLD for label design. A logo can be allocated to these graphic fields in the scales. Prerequisite - Pr 555/ 01 -00 - Pr 555/ 02 -01.... - Pr 606/ 04 -0 to 3 Submenu Label layout from BLD. Select BLD label. Release BLD logo fields Pr110 13 _-____ 13 7 Pr110 13 1-____ Enter logo field number 1-3 confirm Pr110 13 1-___ 7 Enter logo ID confirm In logo field 1, the logo with ID 0007 is being printed. By Count: Pieces per package Submenu 14 Menu setting - Pr 110/ PLU-no../ 07 -3 Article type By Count Enter number of pieces 00-99 pieces per package are possible. Pr110 14 12 save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 49 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight Submenu 15 Enter selection Pr110 15 1 0= Without back calculation 1= With back calculation The unit price per piece or the fixed weight per kg is calculated. save 7 By-Count: Mandatory input of pieces Submenu 16 Enter selection Pr110 16 0 0= No mandatory input 1= with mandatory input save The number of pieces per package must always be entered in the sale. By-Count: Fixed weight Submenu 17 Enter fixed weight for a package Pr110 17 000560 000000 - 999999 save By-Count: Fixed weight mode Submenu 18 Enter mode Pr110 18 0 0= Standard 1= lboz (g) 2= oz (lboz) 3= oz (g) 4= oz (lb) save A second representation of the unit is printed in brackets. 7 - 50 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Article maintenance Pr 1-- Mandatory input of fixed weight Submenu 19 Pr110 19 Enter selection 0 0= No mandatory input 1= with mandatory input save The fixed weight must always be entered in sales. 7 VAT number Submenu 20 Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 - Pr 230 - Pr 231/ 03 -0 VAT is activated VAT rate has been defined VAT rate as of PLU is used Enter VAT number Pr110 20 1-5 = VAT number 1 save The selling price of the selected PLU is calculated with the entered VAT. Overwriteable VAT also see page 6 - 29 Submenu 21 Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 - Pr 230 - Pr 630 - Pr631/ 03 VAT is activated VAT rate has been defined A VAT key has been created reprogrammed keyboard is set Enter selection 0= VAT cannot be overwritten Pr110 21 1 1= VAT can be overwritten save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 51 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- Tare % (dependent on country) If tare % is entered, the tare value increases in parallel to total weight in percent. If e.g. a PLU tare is entered, it is added to percent tare. The total tare is deducted from total weight. Only the net weight is caluclated. Example: An article has a PLU tare of 2 grams and a percent tare of 10%. If the article has a weight of 1000 grams the 2g PLU tare + 10% percent tare are deducted. The display shows the tare weight of 102 g and the net weight of 898g. If the same article has a weight of 1500g the display shows a tare weight of 152g and a net weight of 1348g. 7 Submenu 22 Prerequisite - Pr 606/ 07 Permit tare % Enter the tare % for the PLU save 7 - 52 Pr110 22 000,00 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Article maintenance Pr 1-- 7.15.2 Print PLU (article) lists .................................................... Pr115 Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 5. Print all PLUs Pr115 Select 115 Print PLU list The menu text is displayed. confirm 7 Print PLU list 01 Scroll in submenu using arrow keys. confirm Print PLU list 01 000001-999999 confirm All programmed PLUs are printed. Printing PLU selection Submenu 01 and 02 Enter submenu 01= Print PLU selection with all article lines 02= Print PLU selection with first article line only confirm Enter start PLU no. Confirm start PLU Enter first PLU no. Pr115 01 Pr115 01 000001-999999 Pr115 01 _____1-999999 Pr115 01 000001-______ Pr115 01 000001-____ 12 Confirm the end PLU no. and start printing PLU 1 to 12 are printed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 53 Programming Operating instruction BC II Article maintenance 1-- 7.15.3 Deleting PLU (article) individually ................................... Pr 120 Select 120 confirm Pr120 000015 Enter article (PLU) number confirm PLU 15 is deleted. 7 7.15.4 Deleting PLU (article) from - to ...................................... Pr 121 Select 121 confirm Pr121 _____1-000000 Enter start PLU no. Pr121 000001-______ confirm Pr121 Enter first PLU no. 000001-____ 10 delete PLU 1 to 10 are deleted. 7 - 54 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- 7.16 Data management Menu Pr 2-- Define supplementary texts and allocate them to a text number. Define barcode structure. Make non-PLU settings. Non-PLU are products that are not stored in the scales. _______________________________________________________________________ Creating supplementary texts Pr 200 Create header and footer texts Pr 201 Create scrolling message Pr 202 Print texts Pr 205 Delete texts Pr 206 Define barcode structure Pr 210 Print barcode structure Pr 211 Non-PLU settings Pr 215 BLD label list / print logo list Pr 220 Delete BLD labels / logos Pr 225 Define VAT Pr 230 Manage VAT Pr 231 _______________________________________________________________________ 7.16.1 Creating supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200 An arbitrary text is created and stored in Pr 200. Each text is given a text number. This text number can, for example, be allocated to a PLU product. 500 text numbers may be defined. Example: A supplementary text is saved in Pr 200 as text number 10. This number is entered in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 11 so that this text will be printed in addition to the PLU article text. Select 200 confirm Index _______10 Enter text number confirm Enter text Pr200 C 1500 LI H- see page 7 - 10 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 55 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- 7.16.2 Creating header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201 In Pr 201 header and footer notes are created centrally. Each header and footer text is saved under a text number. A header or footer text is printed when one of these text numbers are entered at: Ticket in Pr 550/ 04 and 05. - Labels in Pr 555/ 09. Select 201 7 confirm Index 10 Enter text number 1 - 99 confirm Enter header or footer text see page 7 - 10 I C 500 LI H- confirm 7 - 56 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- 7.16.3 Defining scrolling message text ...................................... Pr 202 Select 202 confirm Pr202 10 Enter text number 01 - 99 confirm 7 I Enter scrolling message text Text input, see page 7 - 10 C 500 LI H- confirm The output can be changed with control characters: &Z;= Display character-by-character - &W;= Display word-by-word (standard) - &Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.) - &Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.) Control characters can be entered in the text at will. The control character influences the subsequent text. Always place a < ; > after the control character. _______________________________________________________________________ Scrolling message settings for the scale in Pr 516. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 57 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- 7.16.4 Printing texts .................................................................... Pr 205 Requirement - Receipt paper is in the printer - Pr 510/ 04 -0 Ticket paper type is set. Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 6. Select 205 7 confirm Enter submenu Pr205 01 01= Print supplementary texts 02= Print header and footer texts 03= Print scrolling message confirm Pr205 01 0 Start printing The stored texts are printed. 7 - 58 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- 7.16.5 Deleting supplementary texts and header/footer texts . . . Pr 206 Select 206 confirm Enter submenu Pr206 01 01= Delete supplementary text from Pr 200 individually. 02= Delete all supplementary texts from Pr 200. 03= Delete single header and footer text from Pr 201. 04= Delete single scrolling message text from Pr 202. 7 confirm Deleting supplementary text individually Submenu 01 Enter text number from Pr200 1-999999999 Pr206 01 ______101 confirm The text with text number 101 is deleted. Deleting all supplementary texts Submenu Enter 90 02 Pr206 02 90 confirm All supplementary texts in Pr 200 are deleted. Deleting header and footer texts Submenu 03 Enter text number from Pr201 confirm Enter text number from Pr201 Pr206 03 _2 - 00 Pr206 03 02 - 15 confirm Header and footer text with the text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 59 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- Deleting scrolling message texts Submenu 01-99 04 Enter text number from Pr202 confirm Enter text number from Pr202 Pr206 04 _2 - 00 Pr206 04 02 - 15 confirm Scrolling message texts with text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted. 7 7 - 60 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- 7.16.6 Defining barcode structure .............................................. Pr 210 In Pr 210 the structure of the instore code EAN 13 and the code structure for code 128 is created. _______________________________________________________________________ Examples for - Barcode structure code 128 see pge 7 - 26 - Barcode structure instore code EAN 13 see page 7 - 20. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 Structure for code 128, EAN 13 and EAN 8 Select 210 Confirm Submenu 01= Define barcode format 02= Enter code constant 03= Select numeric code 04= Check code structure and save Entering a structure number 1 Pr210 01 - 99 1 Structure number e.g. 02 02 Pr206 01 Confirm structure number Confirm submenu Defining barcode format Pr210 01 Submenu 01 2 Barcode types 0= EAN13 1= Code 128 2= EAN 8 3 Height of barcode 00= Barcode height is taken from Pr 550/02 or Pr 555/07. 05 to 22 = Barcode height in mm 4 OCR line 0= OCR line is printed 1= OCR line is not printed 5 Module width 2 or 3 pixel 10002 2 3 4 5 3 4 confirm Fig. 75: Example with OCR line 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 61 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- Entering a code constant Submenu 02 I 02 C 20 LI HText and numeric input of up to 20 characters is possible for Code 128. Text input see page 7 - 10 For EAN 13 and EAN 8, only numbers with up to 12 digits are possible. confirm confirm 7 Selecting numeric codes Submenu 03 confirm 1 2 Pr210 03 01050 Encoded values 1 2 3 01= price 02= Weight 03= No. of pcs. 04= Foreign currency 05= Part string from PLU Starts at 4th position after code structure number. 06=PLU number 07= Middle check digit Enter 07000 Only for EAN 13. Middle check digit possible in pos. 6, 7 or 8. 08= Unit price 09= Foreign currency unit price 10= Tare 11= Device number, see Pr 605 12= Department number, see Pr 604 13= Operator no. 14= Scale number, see Pr 603 15= 313 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128 16= 131 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128 17= Encode ticket number Number of digits 01 to 10 digits 7 - 62 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- 3 Conversion of variable values 0= Decimal places as per device setting 1=Decimal places are cut off No rounding occurs. 2= There is a cutoff after the first decimal place. No rounding. 3= After the second decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding. 4= After the third decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding. 5= Floating comma only for EAN 13. The code digit (e.g. 22 for price) is increased by the number of omitted digits. The increased code digit means that during scanning of the barcode the number of digits and position of the comma are established. 6= The value to be coded is multiplied by 10. 7= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 10. 8= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 100. 9= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 1000. Brief example: Define code structures for EAN Code 13 (12 position necessary) Pr 210 05 Define structure number, e.g. 05 Pr 210/ 01 00002 (EAN 13 with OCR) Pr 210/ 02 21 Constant, e.g. 21 (2 positions) Pr 210/ 03 Pr 210/ 03 Pr 210/ 03 06040 07000 02050 PLU number (4 positions) Middle check digit (1 position) Weight with 5 positions Pr 210/ 04 Check and save structure 1 Constant 2 digits 2 PLU number 3 Middle check digit, 1 position 4 Weight 5 Automatic check digit from scale 4-digits 5 digits 1 2 3 4 5 Fig. 76: Example barcode 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 63 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- Checking and adopting code structure Submenu 04 confirm Pr210 04 C 337 LI H- Checking code structure by printing out 7 + shift and hold, then total The entered code is printed. Fig. 77: Print code structure Checking code structure in display Decimals as configured 04 C 337 L8 H- or key, or by entering a unit price are booked under this number. These numbers occur in the sales report and the ticket journal. Non-PLU non-weighed article = number (e.g.: 999997) Non-PLU minus article = number+1 (e.g.: 999998) Non-PLU weighed = number+2 (e.g.: 999999) Enter number range Pr215 99 999997 000001 - 999997 PLU numbers are possible. If these numbers are modified, the PLUs within the selected number range will be deleted. save 7 - 70 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- 7.16.9 Printing BLD label list / logo list ...................................... Pr 220 Select 220 confirm Pr220 01 Enter submenu confirm Submenu overview: 7 01= Print BLD label list 02= Print logo list Printing BLD label list Submenu 01 Pr220 01 0 confirm The list of BLD labels stored in the scale is printed. Printing logo list Submenu 02 Pr220 02 0 confirm The list of BLD logos stored in the scale is printed. 7.16.10 Deleting BLD labels / logos ............................................. Pr 225 Select 225 confirm Enter submenu Pr225 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Delete BLD labels 02= Delete BLD logos 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 71 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- Deleting BLD labels Pr225 01 01-00 Submenu 01 Enter BLD label no. confirm Pr225 01 01- 03 Enter BLD label no. confirm The selected labels are deleted. 7 Deleting BLD logos Pr225 02 0001-0000 Submenu 02 Enter BLD logo ID confirm Pr225 02 0001- 0003 Enter BLD logo ID confirm The selected BLD logos are being deleted. Example, see page 7 - 8 7.16.11 Defining VAT ..................................................................... Pr 230 Select 230 confirm Pr230 1 Enter VAT number 1-5 confirm Enter submenu Pr230 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Define VAT rate 02= VAT inclusive or exclusive 03= VAT text 7 - 72 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Data management 2-- Defining VAT rate also see page 7 - 37 Submenu 01 Enter VAT rate in %, e.g. 19% 0-99 Pr230 01 19,00 confirm VAT inclusive or exclusive Submenu 02 VAT inclusive or exclusive 0= VAT inclusive 1= VAT exclusive 7 Pr230 02 0 confirm VAT text Submenu 03 Enter text 19% inclusive 03 C20 LI H- confirm The VAT rate is defined. Up to 5 different VAT rates can be defined. Press Esc 230 2 The next VAT number is displayed. confirm Pr230 01 The next VAT rate (no. 2) can be defined. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 73 Programming Operating instruction BC II Data management Pr 2-- 7.16.12 Managing VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231 Select 231 confirm Pr231 01 confirm 7 Submenu overview: 01= Print VAT data record list 02= Delete VAT number 03= General VAT Printing VAT list Submenu 01 confirm Pr231 01 0 The list containing the defined VAT rates is printed. Deleting VAT numbers Submenu 02 Enter VAT number 1 to 5 confirm Enter VAT number 1 to 5 Pr231 02 1-0 Pr231 02 1-3 confirm The VAT number data records 1, 2 and 3 are deleted. Same VAT for all articles Submenu 03 Enter VAT number Pr231 03 2 0= Use PLU and non-PLU VAT 1 - 5= Use same VAT for all articles confirm 7 - 74 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Reports Pr 3-- 7.17 Reports menu Pr 3-- _______________________________________________________________________ Configure report layout Pr 300 Printing reports on ticket Pr 310 Printing report on label Pr 311 Displaying / deleting sales Pr 320 _______________________________________________________________________ 7.17.1 Configuring report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 Select 300 confirm Enter submenu Pr 300 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Printout of prices 02= Printout of PLU without sales 03= Printout of customer name for PLU report (Pr 310/ 02 and 03) 04= Printout of customer name for product group report (Pr 310/ 04) 05= Printout of customer name for operator report (Pr 310/ 05) 06= Printout of customer name for scale total sales (Pr 311/ 01) and operator total sales report (Pr 310/ 05) 07= Printout of customer name for data of origin report (Pr 310/ 06 and 07) 08= Printout of customer name for VAT report (Pr 310/ 05) Printout of prices Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr 300 01 0 0= Prices are not printed 1= Prices are printed confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 75 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Reports Pr 3-- Printout PLU without sales Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr 300 02 0 0= PLUs without sales are not printed 1= PLUs without sales are printed confirm 7 Customer name for reports Submenu 03 to 08 New report names (customer names) are created in Pr 201. Allocate text number of a name to report, e.g. 03. Enter text number Pr 300 03 01 01-99 Text number from Pr 201. 00 Print standard name. confirm 7 - 76 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Reports Pr 3-- 7.17.2 Printing reports on ticket ................................................. Pr 310 The reports can either be printed or printed and deleted. _______________________________________________________________________ Observe report layout configuration Pr 300, see page 7 - 75. _______________________________________________________________________ Select 310 confirm Enter submenu 7 Pr 310 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Scale report 02= PLU report with an article text line 03= PLU report with all article text lines 04= Product groups report 05= Operator report 06= Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data of origin 07= Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of origin 08= VAT sales report Scales report Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr 310 01 0 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing Reports on PLU, operators, product groups and data of origin are printed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 77 Programming Operating instruction BC II Reports Pr 3-- PLU report with one article text line Submenu 02 Pr310 02 0 Enter selection 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing PLU report with one article text line is printed. 7 PLU report with all article text lines Submenu 03 Pr310 03 0 Enter selection 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing The PLU report is being printed with all article text lines. 1 Unit price 2 Sales of this PLU 3 Number of canceled reports +1 If the number is 9, no. 8 reports have been canceled. PLU unit price overwritten 4 5 Number of recordings 6 Sold quantity 7 Date and time of previous report 8 Product group 9 PLU number 10 PLU text 11 Date and time of current report 7 - 78 11 10 1 * 9 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 Fig. 79: PLU product report 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Reports Pr 3-- Product group report Submenu 04 Pr310 04 0 Start printing The product group report is printed. 1 Sales for this product group 2 Number of recordings 3 Sold quantity 4 Product group number 7 4 3 2 1 Fig. 80: Product group report 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 79 Programming Operating instruction BC II Reports Pr 3-- Operator report Submenu 05 Pr310 05 0 Enter selection 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing The operator report is being printed. 7 1 Sales of operator 1 2 Sales of operator 2 3 Operator total sales 4 5 Number of canceled reports +1 The operator report documents how often scale sales have been deleted before the current report. If the number is 10, no. 9 reports have been canceled. Date and time of last report canceled 6 Operator no. 7 Date and time of current report 7 1 6 2 3 4 5 Fig. 81: Operator report 7 - 80 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Reports Pr 3-- Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data of origin Submenu 06 Pr310 06 0 Enter selection 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing The sales by data of origin report is printed providing one text line that contains data of origin. Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of origin Submenu 07 Pr310 07 0 Enter selection 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing The sales by data of origin is printed providing all text line that contain data of origin. In the sales by data of origin report, the data of origin is printed with the number of sold items and sold weight. 1 Number of sold items 2 sold weight 3 Text of origin 4 Data of origin no. 4 1 3 2 Fig. 82: Sales by data of origin report 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 81 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Reports Pr 3-- VAT sales report Submenu 08 Pr310 08 0 Enter selection 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report Start printing 7 1 The VAT sales report is printed. VAT inclusive 2 VAT exclusive 3 VAT text 5 4 VAT rate 4 5 VAT number 3 6 1 Reporting period: 6 Date and time of current report 7 Date and time of previous report Sales results obtained within the period between the current report and the previous report. 2 7 Fig.: 83: VAT sales report 7.17.3 Printing report on label Select 311 ................................................... Pr 311 Pr311 0 Start printing The scale total sales are printed. 1 Scale number 2 Total sales of scale 3 Number of sales deletions 1 3 2 Fig. 84: Total sales report 7 - 82 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Reports Pr 3-- 7.17.4 Displaying / deleting sales .............................................. Pr 320 Select 320 confirm Pr320 01 Enter submenu 01= Display total sales of scale 02= Delete sales 7 confirm Displaying sales Submenu 01 Pr320 01 confirm 364,15 The scale total sales are displayed. Deleting sales Submenu 02 _______________________________________________________________________ The scale total sales are completely deleted! _______________________________________________________________________ Pr320 02 90 Enter 90 confirm The scale total sales are deleted. The deletion is booked, see page 7 - 82. Delete journal Submenu 99 _______________________________________________________________________ Deleting ticket journal from device! _______________________________________________________________________ Enter 90 Pr320 99 90 confirm Deleting ticket journal from device 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 83 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18 Configuration menu Pr 5-- _______________________________________________________________________ 7 Setting date and time Pr 500 Setting main operating mode Pr 510 Setting switching operating mode Pr 511 Settings for different operating modes Pr 515 Scrolling message settings Pr 516 Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 520 Settings for quick-operator mode Pr 521 Settings for price labeling mode Pr 525 Configuring operator keys with operator no. Pr 530 PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535 Printing out PLU direct keys Pr 536 Tare fixed value memory Pr 540 Rounding and price calculating settings Pr 545 Designing ticket and releasing barcode print Pr 550 Designing labels and releasing barcode print Pr 555 Labels configuration management Pr 556 Foreign currency settings Pr 560 Ticket call-up data volume Pr 570 _______________________________________________________________________ 7.18.1 Setting date and time ....................................................... Pr500 Select 500 confirm Enter submenu Pr500 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Setting date 02= Setting time 03= Print year number either 2 or 4-digit 04= Date presentation 7 - 84 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Setting date Submenu 01 Enter date Input DDMMYY The sequence is dependent on the setting in submenu 04 Pr500 01 190508 save Setting time Submenu 02 Enter time Input hhmm 7 Pr500 02 0908 save Printing year either 2 or 4-digital Submenu 03 Enter selection Pr500 03 0 0= Year with 2 digits 1= Year with 4 digits save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 85 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Date representation Submenu 04 Enter selection Pr500 04 00 save 7 Input in Pr 500/ 01 Print Example 00 Day-Month-Y ear numeric DDMMYY 21.07.06 01 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMMYY 21July 06 02 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMM 21July 03 Month year alphanumeric MMYYDD July 06 04 Month-Day-Y ear American numeric MMDDYY 07.21.06 05 Month-Day-Y ear American alphanumeric MMDDYY July 21.06 06 Year-Month-Day Hungarian numeric YYMMDD 06.07.21 07 Year-Month-Day Hungarian alphanumeric YYMMDD 06July 21 08 Day-Month-Y ear numeric DDMMYY 21-07-06 09 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMMYY 21-July-06 7 - 86 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.2 Setting main operating mode Pr510 2 operating modes can be set simultaneously. The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511. Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination + . Select 510 confirm Enter submenu 7 Pr510 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01 = Select main operating type 02= Select layout 03= Addition of customer total 04= Select paper type Selecting main operating mode Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr510 01 01 save 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start Selecting layout Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr510 02 0 0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 87 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Addition of customer total Only effective on labels. Example: A customer buys several articles. One label is created per article Afterwards a total label is created The total is printed if ”with addition” has been set. Submenu 03 Enter selection 7 Pr510 03 0 0= without addition of customer total. 1= with addition of customer total. save Select paper type Submenu 04 Enter selection Pr510 04 0 0= Ticket paper 1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer) confirm 7 - 88 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.3 Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511 2 operating modes can be set simultaneously. The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511. Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination + . Select 511 confirm Enter submenu Pr511 01 7 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Select switching operating mode 02= Select layout 03= Addition of customer total 04= Select paper type Selecting switching operating mode Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr511 01 02 save 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start Selecting layout Only effective for operating modes that allow ticket and label layout e.g. multi-operator mode. Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr511 02 1 0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 89 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Addition of customer total Only effective on labels. Submenu 03 Enter selection Pr511 03 0 0= without addition of customer total. 1= with addition of customer total. save 7 Select paper type Submenu 04 Enter selection Pr511 04 0 0= Ticket paper 1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer) confirm 7.18.4 Settings for different operating modes ........................... Pr515 Select 515 confirm Enter submenu Pr515 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Automatic zerosetting. 02= Open tickets / labels 03= Origin labeling 04= Automatic data of origin number. 05= Negative customer total permitted or not permitted. 06= Determination of sales. 07= Mandatory input for By Count piece 08= Mandatory input for fixed weight Automatic zero setting Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr515 01 0 0= Scale is reset (within the limits for automatic zerosetting). 1= Zerosetting error 115 is displayed, when the weight value is below zero. 2= Scale is not set to zero. save 7 - 90 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Open tickets / labels Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr515 02 0 0 = open tickets are printed. After switching on the scales, open tickets are automatically printed. 1= open tickets are not printed and not deleted. If open tickets exist after the scales have been switched on, they have to be finalized ( ). save 7 Origin labeling also see page 7 - 32 Submenu 03 Enter selection Pr515 03 0 0= Origin labeling off. 1= Enter data of origin number manually. 2 =Use defined data of origin number. save Defining data of origin number Submenu 04 Enter selection Pr515 04 35 00-99 = defined traceability no. save All articlse (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text that is stored under the defined traceability number. Negative customer total Submenu 05 Enter selection Pr515 05 1 0= Customer total cannot become negative. 1= Customer total can become negative. save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 91 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Sales calculation To create the reports ( Pr310 and Pr 311), the sold items have to be added in the total memory. Submenu 06 Enter selection Pr515 06 1 0= Sold items are not added to the total memories. 1 = Sold items are added to the total memories. save 7 Mandatory input for By Count pieces Submenu 07 Enter selection Pr515 07 1 0= Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/16 1= Mandatory input for By Count piece save Mandatory input for fixed weight Submenu 08 Enter selection Pr515 08 1 0= Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/19 1= Mandatory input for fixed weight and By Count fixed weight save 7 - 92 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.5 Scrolling message settings ............................................ Pr 516 Select 516 confirm Enter submenu Pr516 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Select scrolling message no. from Pr 202 02= Select display location 03= Activate scrolling message 04 = Test scrolling message 7 Selecting scrolling message no. Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr516 01 00 00= Scrolling message not active 00-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202 save Selecting display location Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr516 02 0 0= Scrolling message on customer side 1= Scrolling message on operator side 2= Scrolling message on both sides save Activating scrolling message Submenu 03 Enter selection Pr516 03 0 0 = Scrolling message starts even with open operator accounts. 1= Scrolling message only starts when the scale is not being operated. save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 93 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Testing scrolling message Submenu 04 Pr516 04 1 confirm The scrolling message is displayed with control characters &Zscrolling message 04 - - - - - 7 7.18.6 Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520 _______________________________________________________________________ To enable the settings in Pr 520 to be applied, the multi-operator operating mode has to be set. Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode _______________________________________________________________________ Select 520 confirm Enter submenu Pr520 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Constant key function 02= Print article and total label 03= Items operator display mode 04= Cash register functions 05= Amount tend./change operation 06= Talon printout 07= Repeat ticket 08= Open ticket again 09= Print cancellation and canceled products 10= Print included VAT 11= Print ticket, as required Constant key function Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr520 01 0 0= Fix unit price 1= Fix tare value 2= Fix unit price and tare value save 7 - 94 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Printing article and total label Prerequisite - Pr 510/ 02 -1 or - Pr 511/ 02 -1 Submenu Label layout is set Label layout is set 02 Pr520 02 0 Enter selection 0= Print article and total label 1= Only print total label 2= Only print article label 7 save 0= Print article and total label The article label is printed when an article is registered. The total label is printed when the and, e.g., keys are pressed. 1= Only print total label The article is registered but not printed when an operator key, e.g. , is pressed. The total label is printed when the and, e.g., keys are pressed. 2= Only print article label The article label is printed when an article is registered. The total is displayed when the and, e.g., keys are pressed. _______________________________________________________________________ The number of items is printed on the total label. The customer total (€) is only printed, if addition of customer total is set in Pr510/03 -1 or Pr511/03 -1. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 95 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Items operator display Submenu 03 Enter selection 1 Display for sheet cancellation 2 Display after recording 3 Display for total/subtotal Pr520 03 001 1 2 3 0= inactive 1= active 7 save Example: The operator number ”OP 1” and the number of registered items ”Po 2” appear in the display. Cash register functions Submenu 04 Total OP 1 Po 2 * [1] 2,54 Pr520 04 0 Enter selection 0= Cash register does not open; registration is always permitted 1= Cash register opens after pressing and keys. You can register when the cash register is open. 2= Cash register opens only after registration and pressing and keys. You can register when the cash register is open. 3= Cash register opens after pressing and keys. You cannot register when the cash register is open. 4= Cash register opens only after registration and pressing and keys. You cannot register when the cash register is open. save 7 - 96 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Amount tend./change operation Prerequisite - Pr 606/10 -1 Submenu Ticket journal on Pr520 05 0 05 Enter selection 0= without amount tend./change operation 1= Amount tend./change operation with a currency 2= Combined amount tend./change operation in local currency and foreign currency * 7 save _______________________________________________________________________ If the amount paid in/out is to be printed, activate printout in Pr 550/ 12 -1. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Recording with full ticket memory no longer possible. ”JournAl” appears in the display. - Call-up and delete ticket journal via EDP interface, e.g.WinCWS. Recording is permitted again. _______________________________________________________________________ Talon printout also see page 6 - 26 Submenu 06 Pr520 06 00 Enter selection 00= without talon 01-99 = with talon, the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds. save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 97 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Repeating ticket The complete and printed ticket can be printed again. also see page 6 - 27 Submenu 07 Pr520 07 0 Enter selection 0= without repeat ticket 1= with repeat ticket save 7 Opening ticket again also see page 6 - 27 Submenu 08 Pr520 08 0 Enter selection 0= without ticket reopening 1= with ticket reopening save 7 - 98 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Printing cancellation and canceled articles also see page 6 - 27 Submenu 09 Enter selection 0= without printing cancellation and canceled articles 1= with printing cancellation and canceled articles Pr520 09 0 save Printing included VAT 7 also see page 7 - 37 Submenu 10 Enter selection 0= without printing included VAT 1= Printout of included VAT Pr520 10 0 save Ticket printout, as required. also see page 6 - 26 Submenu 11 Enter selection 0= Ticket printout as required ( + ) 1= Always print ticket Pr520 11 0 save _______________________________________________________________________ Customer ticket can be deactivated The scale offers the option of suppressing printout of the customer ticket. According to EC directive 90/384/EC for Non-Automatic Weighing Instruments, the customer is entitled to a receipt in order to check the sales transactions in accordance with Appendix 1, No.14. Suppression of the customer ticket should therefore only be activated if you are sure that there is no customer requirement for printout of a customer ticket. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 99 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.7 Settings for quick service mode Pr 521 Description, see page 6 - 4 _______________________________________________________________________ To enable the settings in Pr 521 to be applied, the quick service operating mode has to be set. Pr 510/ 01 -03 Quick-service mode _______________________________________________________________________ Select 521 7 confirm Pr521 Enter selection 1 0= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, recording with the Operator key. 1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, automatic recording. confirm 7 - 100 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.8 Settings for price labeling mode * ................................... Pr525 _______________________________________________________________________ To ensure that the settings in Pr 525, it is absolutely necessary to set the operating mode multi-operator mode. Pr 510/ 01 -04Price labeling with release by hand or Pr 510/ 01 -05Price labeling with automatic start _______________________________________________________________________ Select 525 confirm Enter submenu Pr525 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Labeling mode 02= Piece price multi- label printing Labeling mode Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr525 01 0 0= Price labeling Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported. Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight. Batch total label with number of items and batch price. 1= Weight labeling Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported. Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight. Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. * 2= Weight labeling only Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported. If only the weight should be printed on the label, the unit price has to be ”0.00”. Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. * save 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 101 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Multiple label printing for price per piece Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr525 02 00 00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay. 01 - 99= Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay. save 7 7 - 102 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.9 Allocating operator no. to operator keys Select 530 ........................ Pr 530 Pr530 __ - ___ confirm Enter key number (1-16) Pr530 02 - 002 confirm 7 Pr530 02 - 020 Enter operator number (1-999) save 7.18.10 PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535 Select 535 confirm Enter submenu Pr535 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input 02= PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. 03= PLU direct key mode 04= PLU direct key allocation 05= PLU range limitation 06= Delay time for PLU no. input 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr535 01 0 0= Enter unit price via ten-key keypad. Switch to PLU no. input by pressing the key. 1= PLU no. input via ten-key keypad. Switch to unit price input by pressing the key. 2= It is possible to enter the PLU no. via the ten-key keypad, but not the unit price. confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 103 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad Submenu 02 Pr535 02 6 Enter selection 2= PLU no. input with 2 digits 3= PLU no. input with 3 digits 4= PLU no. input with 4 digits 5= PLU no. input with 5 digits 6= PLU no. input with 6 digits 7 confirm PLU direct key mode Submenu 03 Pr535 03 0 Enter selection 0= No range limitation: The PLU direct key no. corresponds to the PLU product number. With range limitation: The PLU direct key no. calls up the PLU article number according to the range, see submenu 05. 1= PLU direct keypad is locked. PLU call-up is only possible with the ten-key keypad. 2= The PLU direct key no. calls up the individually allocated PLU article numbers, see submenu 04. The range limitation only applies for PLU no. call-up via the ten-key keypad. confirm PLU direct key allocation Prerequisite - Pr 535/ 03 -2 PLU article no. is taken from the PLU direct key allocation. An article (PLU no.) can be allocated to any PLU direct key. Submenu 04 Enter PLU direct key no. (001-246) Pr535 04 019 - 000019 confirm Enter PLU article number (0-999999) Pr535 04 019 - 000001 confirm The PLU direct key is used to call-up the allocated PLU article number. 7 - 104 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- PLU range limitation _______________________________________________________________________ The PLU range limitation does not affect the PLU direct keys where the setting is Pr 535/03 -2. _______________________________________________________________________ If only some of the articles stored in a scale are required, the articles can be limited for this scale. Example: There are 2000 articles stored in the scales. Fruit articles from PLU 1 to PLU 100. Cheese articles from PLU 101 to PLU 200. Cold cut articles from PLU 201 to PLU 800 etc. 7 Only cheese is supposed to be sold at the cheese scale. The articles in the cheese scale are limited to articles 101 to 200. This means that the lowest range article number is allocated to PLU 1. Submenu 05 Pr535 05 ___101 - 999999 Enter the lowest PLU article no. in the range confirm Pr535 05 000101 - ___200 Enter the highest PLU article number in the range confirm Article 101 is called up with PLU no. 1, and article 200 with PLU no. 100. Calls outside of the range are rejected. W/o range limitation Article number = PLU-No With range limitation Article PLU call-up Article PLU call-up Fig. 85: PLU range limitation 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 105 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Delay time PLU no. input If e.g. a 6-digit PLU no. input is expected, and only a 2-digit no. is input, the PLU is called after the set delay time. Submenu 06 Input time delaye.g.10 Pr535 06 10 00= The desired PLU is called with or after entering all digits. 00-20 = The desired PLU is called after the set delay time. 7 confirm The delay time value (01-20) is not specified in seconds. 1= small delay time; 20= large delay time. 7 - 106 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.11 Printing PLU direct keys .................................................. Pr536 Overview of the allocation of articles (PLU number) to the PLU direct keys. Select 536 confirm Pr536 Start printing. 0 The PLU direct key list is printed. Esc 7 Cancel print job. 1 PLU number 2 PLU direct key 2 1 Fig. 86: PLU direct keys 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 107 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- 7.18.12 Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540 Select 540 Pr540 _ - ____ confirm Enter the tare direct key (1-4) Pr540 1 - 0000 confirm 7 Pr540 Enter assigned tare value 1 - 0002 confirm 7.18.13 Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 545 The last 2 digits of the customer total and article total can be rounded. If a related text is required, this can be released for printing in Pr 550/ 07. The text has to be defined in Pr 200. _______________________________________________________________________ Rounding and price calculation settings are specific to country. _______________________________________________________________________ Select 545 confirm Pr545 01 Enter submenu confirm Submenu overview: 01= Rounding of customer total 02= Rounding of article total 03= Rounding for By count 7 - 108 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Rounding methods for customer total * Submenu 01 Pr545 01 0 Enter selection confirm 0= no rounding 1= rounding down to 5 2= rounding down to 10 3= rounding down to 50 4= rounding down to 100 5= mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9= mathematical rounding to 100* Rounding of article total Submenu 7 * 02 Enter selection Pr545 02 0 confirm 0= no rounding 1= rounding down to 5 2= rounding down to 10 3= rounding down to 50 4= rounding down to 100 5= mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9= mathematical rounding to 100* Examples of rounding, see page 7 - 110. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 109 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-Examples of rounding Setting Explanation 0 No rounding Rounding down to 5 The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”. Rounding down to 10 The last digit is always ”0”: Rounding down to 50 The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”. Rounding down to 100 The last digits are always ”00”. Mathematical rounding to 5 The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”. 1 2 7 Example 3 4 5 Mathematical rounding to 10 The last digit is always ”0”: Mathematical rounding to 25 The last digits are always ”00”, 25”,”50” or ”75”. 6 7 Mathematical rounding to 50 The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”. 8 Mathematical rounding to 100 The last digits are always ”00”. 9 10.43 è 10.43 10.42 è 10.40 10.48 è 10.45 10.42 è 10.40 10.48 è 10.40 10.34 è 10.00 10.83 è 10.50 10.43 è 10.00 10.76 è 10.00 10.42 è 10.40 10.43 è 10.45 10.48 è 10.50 10.42 è 10.40 10.48 è 10.50 10.12 è 10.00 10.23 è 10.25 10.45 è 10.50 10.66 è 10.75 10.88 è 11.00 10.21 è 10.00 10.34 è 10.50 10.83 è 11.00 10.43 è 10.00 10.78 è 11.00 Rounding for By count Submenu 03 Enter selection 0= mathematical 1= round up next position Pr545 03 0 save 7 - 110 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.19 Ticket design overview Information can be added, disabled or modified on the ticket. 1 Scale number Pr 603 Enter scale number 1 17 2 16 2 3 4 5 Ticket counter Pr 550/10 - 1 Ticket counter print Operator number 7 8 Minus input, 9 Ticket total 10 11 14 key 4 5 Basic price Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 unit price Selling price Tare Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 PLU tare Pr 550/ 03 Tare printout Non-weighed, key 6 3 15 6 13 7 Footer text Pr 201 Enter footer text Pr 550/ 05 Footer text printout Barcode see page 7 - 16. Pr 215/ 05 Totals barcode Pr215/ 04 Barcode for non-PLU minus Pr 110/ PLU number/ 05 PLU barcode Pr 210/ Barcode structure for instore code Pr 550/ 01 Barcode printout Pr 550/ 02 Barcode height 8 12 9 11 10 Fig. 87: Ticket example 12 Item counter 13 PLU article text Pr 110/PLU no./10 Enter PLU article text Pr 550/ 8 Select font Pr 550/ 9 Number of product text lines to be printed 14 Time Pr 500/ 02 15 Date Pr 500/ 01 Enter date Pr 500/ 03 year number either 2- or 4-digit Pr 500/ 04 Select date format 16 Department no. Pr 604 Enter number 17 Header text Pr 201 Create header text Pr 550 / 04 Printout of header text 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 111 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- 7.19.1 Creating ticket ................................................................. Pr 550 Select 550 confirm Enter submenu Pr550 01 confirm 7 Submenu overview: 01= Print barcode on ticket 02= Barcode height in mm on ticket 03= Print tare on ticket 04= Print header text 05= Print footer text 06= Print foreign currency supplementary text 07= Print rounding supplementary text 08= Font change on ticket 09= Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket 10= Ticket counter printout 11= Print foreign currency * 12 = Print amount paid in/out 13= Print supplementary texts 14= Print header logo 15= Print footer logo Printing barcode on ticket Submenu 01 Enter selection 1 Article barcode 2 Totals barcode 3 Talon barcode Pr550 01 000 1 2 3 0= Do not print barcode on ticket 1= Print barcode save Barcode height in mm on ticket Submenu 02 Enter selection 5-22 mm Pr550 02 17 confirm 7 - 112 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Printing tare on ticket Submenu 03 Enter selection Pr550 03 0 0= Do not print tare value on ticket 1= Print tare value, net weight is marked. (country-specific character) Germany = N. 2= Print tare value, net weight is not marked. confirm 7 Printing header text Prerequisite The header text has to be defined in Pr 201. Requirement The header text has to be defined in Pr 201. Submenu 04 Enter selection Pr550 04 01 00= no printout of header text 01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 56. confirm Printing footer text Prerequisite The footer text has to be defined in Pr 201. Submenu 05 Enter selection Pr550 05 02 00= no printout of footer text 01-99 = Footer text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 56. confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 113 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Printing foreign currency supplementary text Submenu 06 Pr550 06 000000000 Enter selection 000000000= No foreign currency supplement. text 1-999999999= Foreign currency supplement. text number see Pr 200 confirm Printing rounding supplementary text 7 _______________________________________________________________________ The rounding supplementary text is only printed if rounding has taken place. _______________________________________________________________________ Submenu 07 Pr550 07 000000000 Enter selection 000000000= without rounding suppl. text 1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number, see Pr 200 confirm 1 Total 2 rounded total 3 Rounding text 1 3 2 Fig. 88: Example of rounding text 7 - 114 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Font change on tickets Each article text was created with selected font. This PLU font is used for printing. (Text in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 10). A fixed and pre-set font can be defined for all printouts. This font has priority over the PLU font. Submenu 08 Enter selection Pr550 08 000 000= Font from PLU 001-1 10= fixed font. The font set in the PLU is ignored. 7 confirm Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket Submenu 09 Enter selection Pr550 09 0 0= all text lines are printed 1-9 = the corresponding number of lines are printed 10= text lines not printed confirm Ticket counter printout Submenu 10 Enter selection Pr550 10 1 0= Counter is not printed 1= Counter is printed confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 115 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Printing foreign currency Submenu 11 Pr550 11 0000 Enter selection 1 Print conversion rate 2 Print unit price, selling price and total 3 Print selling price and total 4 Only print total 1 2 3 4 0= No printout 1= Printout 7 save Printing amount paid in/out Prerequisite - Pr 520/ 05 -1 or2 Amount paid in/out enabled. Requirement - Pr 520/ 05 -1 or2 Amount paid in/out enabled. Submenu 12 Pr550 12 0 Enter selection 0= No printout 1= Printout confirm Printing supplementary texts Prerequisite - Pr 110/PLU no./11 Submenu 13 Enter selection Assign supplement. text to article Pr550 13 0 0= No printout 1= Printout confirm 7 - 116 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Printing header logo Submenu 14 Enter logo ID Pr550 14 __12 0000= Do not print logo 0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID confirm Header and footer logos can be created with Bizerba Label Designer and loaded onto the scale. Logos present in the scale can be printed out, see page 7 - 8. Printing footer logo Submenu 14 Enter logo ID Pr550 15 __12 0000= Do not print logo 0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 117 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- 7.20 Label design - overview Information can be added, disabled or modified on the label. 1 2 7 3 4 Label texts Pr 555/ 16 Print release for standard or alternative texts Pr 555/ 20 and 21 Alternative texts Sell-by date Pr 555/ 05 Print Pr 110/ PLU no./ 04 shelf-life days Pr 215/ 01 Non-PLU shelf-life days Net weight Selling price 12 13 1 11 2 10 1 1 9 3 1 8 7 6 5 4 Fig. 89: Example of label 43 mm 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Basic price Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 . . . . . . . . . Print price frame Pr 555/ 16 Packed-on date Pr 555/ 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 500/ 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Barcode Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 . . . . . . . . Pr 215/ 2; 3; 4; 5 . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator no. Pr 555/ 17 PLU article text Pr 110/ PLU-No/ 10 . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/ PLU-No/11 . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logo printout Pr 555/ 11 Header Pr 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tare Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 . . . . . . . . . Pr 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555/ 08 -1- . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 118 Enter PLU unit price Release print Enter date Enter article barcode Enter non-PLU barcode and total barcode Release barcode print Enter height of barcode Enter article text Assign supplem. text Release print of supplementary texts Create beginning of text field Create beginning of data field Set data field monitoring Enter header text Release print of header text Enter PLU tare value Enter tare value for the tare fixed value key Release tare print 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- BLD labels These labels are designed in BLD. The labels are issued with a number and are sent to the scales and stored there. _______________________________________________________________________ Release BLD text fields and logo fields during commissioning (memory management) Pr 606/ 3 and 4, see page 7 - 144 _______________________________________________________________________ 1 Logo field 1 2 Text field 1 7 1 2 Fig. 90: Example of label layout in BLD Allocate text field content, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 12, on page 7 - 48. Allocate logo field content, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 13, on page 7 - 49 1 Allocated logo in logo field 1 2 Allocated text in text field 1 1 2 Fig. 91: Example of BLD label in the scales 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 119 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- 7.20.1 Designing labels .............................................................. Pr 555 Select 555 confirm Enter submenu Pr555 01 confirm 7 Submenu overview: 01= Label type 02= Select BLD labels 03= Label size 04= Change label distance 05= Packed-on and sell-by date on label 06= Barcode on label 07= Barcode height in mm on label 08= Tare printout on label 09= Print header text 10= Alternative text with sell-by date 11= Logo printout 12= Beginning of text field 13= Beginning of data field 14= Monitoring data field 15= Font change on label 16= Print price frame and texts on label 17= Print operator no., machine ID or check digit * on label 18= Print foreign currency 19= Rotate layout by 180° (for label paper only) and reverse operation 20= Alternative text with packed-on date 21= Alternative text with use-by date 22= Print units on the label 23= Print speed for label layout 7 - 120 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Label type Submenu 01 Pr555 01 01 Enter selection 00= Label from BLD, see 555 / 02, only possible if BLD layouts are available. Label type 01= Bizerba label standard 02= Bizerba label layout 1 03= Bizerba label layout 2 04= Bizerba label layout 3 Width x height H 58mm x 43 mm 58mm x 43 mm 58mm x 43 mm 58mm x 43 mm W 05= ISB with barcode 06= ISB w/o barcode 50mm x 48 mm 50mm x 48 mm 07= Narrow label with barcode 08= Narrow label w/o barcode 09= Narrow label w/o barcode 10= Bizerba label layout 4 33mm x 47 mm 33mm x 47 mm 37mm x 36 mm 58mm x 38 mm 7 confirm Example: W Label width H Label height W H Fig. 92: Standard 01 Fig. 93: Narrow label 07 6.111.98.5.01.18 Layout 02 Narrow label 08 7 - 121 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Selecting BLD labels Submenu 02 Enter selection 01... Select BLD label Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01 Pr555 02 01 confirm Label size 7 Submenu 03 Enter label height, e.g. 43mm 28-148 mm Pr555 03 043-58 Pr555 03 043-__ confirm _______________________________________________________________________ Input of 54, 55 or 56 is rejected. _______________________________________________________________________ Enter label width e.g. 58mm 10-58 mm Pr555 03 043- 58 confirm Changing label distance Submenu 04 Enter distance Pr555 04 16 8-40dot (8dot= 1mm) confirm Packed-on and sell-by date on label Submenu 05 Enter selection 1 Packed-on date Pr555 05 11 Sell-by date 1 2 2 0= No printout 1= Printout confirm 7 - 122 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Barcode on label Submenu 06 Pr555 06 11 Enter selection 1 Article barcode 2 Totals barcode 1 2 0= No printout 1= Printout confirm 7 Barcode height in mm Submenu 07 Pr555 07 15 Enter height of barcode 5-22 mm Only effective for pre-defined labels. Not effective with BLD labels. confirm 1 2 3 3 Fig. 94: Barcode height 1 Beginning of text field 2 Beginning of data field 3 Barcode height Tara printout on label Submenu 08 Enter selection Pr555 08 1 0= without tare printout 1 = with tare printout confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 123 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Printing header text Submenu 09 Pr555 09 01 Enter selection 00= Do not print header text 01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 confirm 1 1 2 7 3 Header field Logo Header text 2 3 Fig. 95: Header field Alternative text with sell-by date Submenu 10 Enter selection Pr555 10 000000010 000000000= No alternative text. Standard text is printed 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200 confirm Logo printout Submenu 11 Enter logo ID Pr555 11 0007 0000= without logo 0001= Logo Kesko 0002= Logo Tuko 0003= Logo Eko 0004= Logo Sokos A 0005= Logo Sokos B 0006= Logo C 0007= Logo Recycling confirm 7 - 124 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Beginning of text field Pr555 12 00 Submenu 12 Beginning of text field in mm 00= Text field 1 automatically starts 11 mm from top edge of label 11-84 = Beginning of text field in mm from top edge of label confirm Start of data field 7 Pr555 13 00 Submenu 13 Beginning of data field in mm 00= Data field is automatically positioned at the bottom edge of the label 11-84 = Beginning of data field 2 in mm from top edge of label confirm Example of label fields 1 Beginning of text field 2 Beginning of data field 3 Data field 4 1 2 Label height 3 4 Fig. 96: Label fields 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 125 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Data field monitoring Data field monitoring prevents the text field being pushed into the data field. Pr555 Submenu 14 14 0 Enter selection 0 = no data field monitoring 1= Data field monitoring on confirm 7 Example: 3 supplement. texts were assigned to article ”Calf's liver” With setting ”Data field monitoring on” the supplementary texts are not printed, as print lies within data field. 1 2 5 5 3 Fig. 97: Data field monitoring on 1 Beginning of text field 2 Beginning of data field 3 Data field 5 Article and supplementary texts 7 - 126 no data field monitoring 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Font change on tickets A font can be defined for all printouts. This font has priority over the PLU font. Pr555 Submenu 15 15 001 Enter selection 000= Font from PLU 001-1 10= fixed font confirm 7 Printing price frame and texts on label Submenu 16 1 Print standard text, e.g. ”Tare” 2 4 Print standard text e.g. ”Packaged” or alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 20) Print standard text e.g. ”best before” or alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 10 and Pr555/ 21) Print standard text, e.g. ”Net or piece” 5 Print standard text, e.g. ”Price” 6 Print price frame 7 Print supplementary texts 3 Pr555 16 1111111 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0= No printout 1= Printout save Printing operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label Submenu 17 Enter selection Pr555 17 0 0= without output 1 = with operator no. (no. input in Pr 530) 2 =with machine ID (no. input in Pr 605) 3= with digit code * confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 127 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Printing foreign currency Submenu 18 1 Print conversion rate 2 Print unit price, selling price and total 3 Print selling price and total 4 Only print total Pr555 18 1100 1 2 3 4 0= No printout 1= Printout 7 confirm 180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) Submenu 19 Enter selection 1 1= Print layout rotated by 180º 2 1= Reverse label before printing Pr555 19 11 1 2 0= No rotation and no reverse operation 1= Layout is printed rotated by 180º; label is reversed before printing 180º rotation For labels with pre-print turned by 180 Fig. 98: Example: No rotation 7 - 128 Example: Turned layout 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Reverse operation for standard labels The header field height can differ on labels, therefore the header text cannot be preprinted on the next label. The label must be withdrawn to the label start before commencing printing (reverse operation). If a header text has been defined, this will be printed after reversing. If no header text has been defined, the header text area can be used for the article text. If the label has a header field height of 10 mm, reversing is not necessary. Reversing in the case of BLD labels During the creation of freely programmable labels with the PC program Bizerba Label Designer, whether or not reverse operation is used for printing is defined. The reversing function must be selected in the BLD project. If reverse operation is selected, all fields, e.g. article or barcode, can be placed in the header area. The layout is printed after reversing. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 129 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Alternative text for packed-on date Submenu 20 Enter text number Pr555 20 000000010 000000000= No alternative text print 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200 confirm 7 Alternative text for use-by date Submenu 21 Enter text number Pr555 21 000000000 000000000= No alternative text print 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200 confirm Printing units on the label Submenu 22 Enter selection 1 Print price with unit 2 Print unit price with unit 3 Print weight with unit 4 Print tare with unit Pr555 22 1111 1 2 3 4 0= No printout 1= Print unit confirm Printing speed for label layout Submenu 23 The print quality can be improved if the print speed is reduced. Enter selection 00= 44 mm/s 01= 53 mm/s (e.g. when used with batteries) 02= 66 mm/s 03= 88 mm/s 04= 102 mm/s (Standard) 05= 120 mm/s Pr555 23 04 confirm 7 - 130 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.20.2 Labels configuration management ................................. Pr 556 All label settings in Pr 555 can be stored in Pr 556/01. Prerequisite - The layout memory has to be deleted. - Pr 556/ 03 Clear layout memory Select 556 confirm Enter submenu Pr556 01 7 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Save configuration from Pr 555 02= Select label configuration 03= Delete label configuration Saving configuration from Pr 555 Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr556 01 1 1= Layout memory 1 2= Layout memory 2 3= Layout memory 3 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 131 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Selecting label configuration Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr556 02 0 0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing 1= Configuration from layout memory 1 2= Configuration from layout memory 2 3= Configuration from layout memory 3 confirm 7 Deleting label configuration Delete from memory x to memory x x = Layout memory 1-3 03 Pr556 03 1-1 Enter selection Pr556 03 2-1 Submenu confirm Enter selection Pr556 03 2-3 confirm The label configuration in memories 2 and 3 is deleted. 7 - 132 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- 7.20.3 Foreign currency settings ............................................... Pr 560 Select 560 confirm Enter submenu Pr560 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Select foreign currency function 02= Select foreign/ second currency display 03= Foreign currency calculating mode 04= Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout 05= Foreign currency symbol on label for price field 06= Decimal places of foreign currency 07= Foreign currency factor 08= Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) 09= Rounding of foreign currency 10= Foreign currency translation rules 7 Selecting foreign currency function Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr560 01 0 0= Euro/foreign currency off 1= Foreign currency function on 2= Euro function on (only possible for non-Euro devices) confirm Selecting foreign/ second currency display Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr560 02 0 0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-functional) 1= Foreign currency display on Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and total in payment in/out mode confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 133 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Foreign currency calculation method Submenu 03 Enter selection Pr560 03 0 0= Total calculated through conversion 1= Total calculated through addition of selling price confirm 7 Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout Submenu 04 Enter currency symbol Pr560 04 C11 LI H- See text input page 7 - 12 confirm Foreign currency symbol on label for price field Submenu 05 Enter currency symbol Pr560 05 C11 LI H- See text input page 7 - 12 confirm Decimal places in foreign currency Submenu 06 Enter selection Pr560 06 2 0- 3= Decimal places in foreign currency confirm 7 - 134 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Configuration Pr 5-- Foreign currency factor Submenu 07 Enter selection Pr560 07 0 0= factor 1 1= factor 10 2= factor 100 3= factor 1000 4= factor 10000 confirm 7 Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) Submenu 08 Enter selection Pr560 08 0001,00 e.g. 0001.01 confirm Rounding of foreign currency Submenu 09 Enter selection Pr560 09 0 0= no rounding 1= rounding down to 5 2= rounding down to 10 3= rounding down to 50 4= rounding down to 100 5= mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9= mathematical rounding to 100* confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 135 Programming Operating instruction BC II Configuration Pr 5-- Foreign currency translation rules Submenu 10 Pr560 10 0 Enter selection 0= Internal calculation in foreign currency 1= Internal calculation in national currency. The output amount is converted in foreign currency. confirm 7 7.20.4 Ticket call-up data volume Prerequisite - Pr 606/10 - 1 .............................................. Pr 570 Ticket journal on Single items and totals are always transferred when calling up ticket journals via the host interface. This menu is used to set additional data records. Select 560 confirm Enter selection 1 1= Transfer of total EAN code. 0= without 2 1= Transfer of Item EAN code. 0= without 3 1= Transfer of article text. 0= without 7 - 136 Pr570 111 1 2 3 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21 Commissioning menu Pr 6-- _______________________________________________________________________ TCP-IP settings Pr 600 Display current IP address Pr 601 Print out of communication settings Pr 602 Setting scale number Pr 603 Setting department number Pr 604 Setting machine ID Pr 605 Commissioning Pr 606 Setting scale for system (continuous operation) Pr 607 Control display lightning Pr 610 Turn-of f time of scale Pr 615 WLAN settings Pr 621 Beeper on/off Pr 622 Sensitivity of scale Pr 625 Change key function Pr 630 Keyboard selection Pr 631 Clear RAM Pr 666 Enter password for menu Pr 690 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695 _______________________________________________________________________ 7.21.1 TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 600 Select 600 confirm Enter submenu Pr600 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= DHCP 02= Display of scale's current IP address 03= IP: IP address if no DHCP selected 04= Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected 05= Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected 06= DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected 06= DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected 08= Host name: A name can be assigned to the scales. 32 ASCII characters are possible. 09= Leasing address: Display of IP address that has been assigned to the scales by the DHCP server. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 137 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- DHCP Pr600 01 0 Submenu 01 Enter selection 0= no DHCP, use fixed IP address 1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server. The leasing address has been requested, see Pr 600/09. confirm _______________________________________________________________________ If the DHCP server does not assign the requested leasing address, set the leasing address to 000000000000 in Pr 600/09. 7 Then, the DHCP server assigns a new address to the scale. _______________________________________________________________________ Display of scale current IP address Submenu Pr600 02 172017168010 02 confirm IP: IP address if no DHCP selected Submenu 03 Pr600 03 172017168010 Enter selection Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172.17.168.10 would be 172017168010 confirm Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected Submenu 04 Enter selection Pr600 04 255255192000 Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 255.255.192.000 would be 255255192000. confirm Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected Submenu 05 Enter selection Pr600 05 172017129001 Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172.17.129.1 would be 172017129001 confirm 7 - 138 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected Submenu 06 Enter selection Pr600 06 010001001100 Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 10.1.1.100 would be 010001001100 confirm DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected Submenu 07 Enter selection 7 Pr600 07 010001001101 Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 10.1.1.101 would be 010001001101 confirm Host name: Submenu 08 Enter name . 32 ASCII characters are possible. Pr600 08 C32 LI H- confirm Leasing address Display and input The scales are assigned an IP address (leasing address) by the DHCP server. To do this, DHCP has to be switched on, see Pr 600/01-1. If the scales are switched off, the assigned address remains reserved for a certain time. If the displayed leasing address is not changed, the scales request this address again from the DHCP server after being switched on. By entering 000000000000 the DHCP server is requested to assign a new address. Submenu 09 Leasing address Pr600 09 172017168008 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 139 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.2 Display current IP address .............................................. Pr601 Select 601 Pr601 confirm 7.21.3 7 172017168010 Printout of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602 Select 602 Pr602 confirm 1 confirm The communication settings are printed out Fig. 99: Communication settings 7.21.4 Setting scale number ....................................................... Pr 603 Select 603 confirm Pr603 Enter scale number 01-32 12 confirm 7 - 140 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.5 Setting department number ............................................. Pr 604 Select 604 confirm Pr604 Enter department number 001-999 120 7 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 141 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.6 Setting machine ID ........................................................... Pr 605 Select 605 confirm Pr605 1234 Enter machine ID 0001-9999 confirm 7 7.21.7 Commissioning (memory management) ........................... Pr 606 Text memory in the BC II is dynamic. These memories include texts and logos. Depending on the request, either more or less memory can be released for PLU, texts, or ticket items. If changing a value, e.g. number of PLUs, causes the remaining memory to be too small, the entry is rejected. In this case, other values, e.g. number of BLD text fields have to be reduced. Select 606 confirm Enter submenu Pr606 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= No. of PLUs 02= Number of supplementary texts per PLU 03= Number of BLD text fields per PLU 04= Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 05= Number of supplementary texts 06= Number of items (ticket memory) 07= By count, fixed weight and VAT 08= Decimal places* 09= Use expanded RAM 10= Journal function 07= Start database configuration 7 - 142 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- Examples of valid database configuration 2000 PLU 4 supplementary texts per PLU 10 BLD text fields 3 BLD logo fields 500 general texts 1200 items 5000 PLU 3 supplementary texts per PLU 5 BLD text fields 2 BLD logo fields 1000 general texts 1200 items 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 7 - 143 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- No. of PLUs Submenu 01 Enter selection 0100 - 10000 Pr606 01 2000 confirm Number of supplementary texts per PLU Submenu 7 02 Enter selection 0-4 Pr606 02 4 confirm Number of BLD text fields per PLU Submenu 03 Enter selection 0 - 10 Pr606 03 0 confirm Number of BLD logo fields per PLU Submenu 04 Enter selection 0-3 Pr606 04 0 confirm Number of supplementary texts Submenu 05 Enter selection 50 - 3000 Pr606 05 0500 confirm 7 - 144 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- Number of items (ticket memory) Submenu 06 Enter selection 50 - 3000 Pr606 06 1200 confirm By count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % See overview Defining by count article, on page 7 - 33 Submenu 07 Enter selection 1 1= By count on 7 Pr606 07 1111 2 1= Fixed weight on 3 1= Activate VAT 4 1= Tare % permitted If tare 1% is permitted, the percentage can be entered in Pr110/ 22. 1 2 3 4 0= off 1= on confirm Decimal places* *This menu is not enabled for all countries. Submenu 08 Enter selection Pr606 08 2 0-3 = Number of decimal places 4= Country-dependent standard value confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 145 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- Using expanded RAM Submenu 09 _______________________________________________________________________ This function is only enabled if the CPU is equipped with an expanded RAM. - In the Pr 701 printout, there must be written 2 MB RAM. _______________________________________________________________________ Pr606 09 0 Enter selection 7 0= without expanded RAM 1= with expanded RAM confirm _______________________________________________________________________ Enable expanded memory only if many PLUs and large texts are used. If the expanded memory is not required in a scales system, do not enable the expanded RAM. The expanded RAM slows down the system during updates. _______________________________________________________________________ Journal function Submenu 10 Pr606 10 1 Enter selection 0= Ticket journal off 1= Ticket journal on confirm _______________________________________________________________________ Recording with full ticket memory not possible. ”JournAl” appears in the display. - Call-up and delete ticket journal via the EDP interface,e.g. with WinCWS. Registration is enabled again. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ In some countries, the journal function has to be enabled for amount tend./change operation (Pr 520/ 5). _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 146 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- Starting database configuration Submenu 88 Remaining available memory is displayed. Pr606 88 375539 Enter selection Pr606 88 ____90 81 = RAM clearing is carried out and the set configuration values are saved. The scales boot. 90= RAM clearing is carried out and the standard values are saved. The standard values are specific to country. 7 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 147 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.8 Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 607 Continuous operation in system see page 7 - 39. Function as of program version 2.00. _______________________________________________________________________ Always note! - There must be only one master scale in a scale system. - Each scale within the system must have its own IP network address (Pr 600). _______________________________________________________________________ 7 Select 607 confirm Enter submenu 01-04 Pr 607 01 confirm Submenu overview: 01= Scale type 02= Multicast IP address 03= Multicast port number 04= UDP Port number Scale type Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr 607 01 1 0= standard scale (Stand alone) 1= Slave scale (system) 9= Master scale (system) confirm 7 - 148 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- System conditions with slave scales. If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling message on the display. - ”Scale Network off” Scale not entered in system yet. - ”Scale Update” Update of system data running. - If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master data from master scale are stored. - Arrow flashes on display = slave scale in system. _______________________________________________________________________ If the system arrow scale in the system. is flashing, the device functions as master _______________________________________________________________________ Multicast IP address Submenu 02 The Mulitcast IP address indicates to which system the scale was assigned. Any address within the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 can be assigned. All scales in one system must have the same Mulitcast IP address. Pr 607 02 239192000024 Enter address confirm Multicast port number Submenu 03 Basically the works setting must not be changed. Multicast port number factory settings Pr 607 03 06789 confirm UDP port number Submenu 04 Basically the works setting must not be changed. UDP port number factory settings Pr 607 04 01031 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 149 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.9 Controlling display lightning .......................................... Pr 610 Select 610 confirm Pr610 00 Enter selection 00= Display lighting can only be switched on or off manually. 7 01-99 = Time in seconds. Display lighting is automatically switched on or off after the set time. confirm Switch display lighting on manually: + Press and hold the key then press the key. The display lighting is switched on or off. Automatic control of the display lighting: After the last action performed on the scale, the display lighting switches off automatically after 1 to 99 seconds. Setting 01 Display off after approx. 1 second. Setting 99 Display off after approx. 99 seconds. When another action starts on the scale, the display lighting is switched on again automatically. _______________________________________________________________________ When the display lighting is controlled automatically, the lighting can still be manually switched off. If the display lighting is switched off manually, the display lighting can only be switched on again manually. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 150 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.10 Setting turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 615 After a set time the scale is switched off, providing no key function or weight movement takes place. Prerequisite A switch key as main switch. With the on/off switch, the scale must be manually switched off. Select 615 7 confirm Pr615 00 Enter selection 00= Scale is not turned off. 01-99 = Time in minutes, after which the scales are switched off, if no keys are pressed and no weight movement has taken place. confirm 7.21.11 WLAN settings Pr 621 Prerequisite - A WLAN module must be integrated into the scale. _______________________________________________________________________ Settings can only be made in submenus 02 to 07 if WLAN is deactivated;621/ 01 -0. If 00000000 has been entered in 621/ 02, WLAN cannot be activated. _______________________________________________________________________ Select 621 confirm Enter submenu confirm Pr621 01 Submenu overview: 01= Activate WLAN 02= Time slices 03= Ping on/off 04= IP address of WLAN module 05= Test telegram on/off 06= IP address of telegram recipient 07= Port number of telegram recipient 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 151 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- Activating WLAN Submenu 01 Pr621 01 0 Enter selection 0= WLAN off 1= WLAN on confirm _______________________________________________________________________ Procedure for WLAN activation: - Deactivate WLAN 621/ 01 -0 - Make settings in submenus 02 to 07 - Activate WLAN 621/ 01 -1 7 _______________________________________________________________________ Time slices The time for which WLAN is to be active can be set. Submenu 02 Enter time slice no., e.g. 1 0-3 confirm Enter start and end time 1 Start time, e.g. 20.00 hours 2 Pr621 02 _ -________ Pr606 02 1 -00000000 Pr621 02 1 - ________ Pr621 02 1 -20000800 End time, e.g. 08.00 hours 1 2 Active for the whole day= enter 00010001. Time slice inactive= enter 00000000. Esc confirm Pr621 02 _ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Press Pr621 02 You can now select submenu 3. 7 - 152 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- Ping on/off If ping is activated, the scale sends a ping to the WLAN module at set time intervals. Submenu 03 Enter time Recommended setting 300 sec. Pr621 03 _300 0000= Ping off 1-9999 = Ping on; time in sec. between 2 pings. confirm 7 IP address of WLAN module The WLAN module is pinged by the scale, so that it always remains in active status. Submenu 04 Enter IP address Pr621 04 172017168001 Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 stands for 172.17.168.1 confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 153 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- Submenus 05, 06 and 07 enable functional diagnosis of the WLAN. Test telegram on/off A test telegram is periodically sent to a host. Submenu 05 Enter time Pr621 05 0900 0000= Telegram off 1-9999 = Send telegram on; time in sec. between 2 telegrams. confirm 7 IP address of telegram recipient Submenu 06 Enter IP address Pr621 06 172017168001 Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 stands for 172.17.168.1 confirm Port number of telegram recipient Submenu 07 Enter port number Pr621 07 49152 1 - 65536 confirm 7.21.12 Beeper on/off Pr 622 Select 622 confirm Pr622 Enter selection 1 Normal beeper 2 Acceptance beeper 3 Error beeper 111 1 2 3 0= Beeper off 1= Beeper on save 7 - 154 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.13 Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 625 The sensitivity setting regulates damping in the event of vibrations at the place of installation (e.g. market operation). _______________________________________________________________________ The higher the setting, the longer the time until standstill of the display. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 Select 625 confirm Pr625 Enter selection 0 0= Display sensitive (standard) with stable, vibration-free scale floor area 1 2 increasingly insensitive .. 5= Display insensitive to vibrations confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 155 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.14 Changing key functions Prerequisite - Pr 631 - 03 ................................................... Pr 630 84-key keyboard reprogrammed; must be set. Select 630 Pr630 0 confirm 7 Pr630 _____ Press . The function is active. { Press any key,e.g.. The function code of this key is displayed. Pr630 32817 Enter new function code,e.g.<33281> for Fixed tare 2. Pr630 33281 Press . The new key function is saved. Another key can be modified. Pr630 _____ Press . The menu is exited. _______________________________________________________________________ - The function code of reserved keys, e.g. ; ; etc. is not displayed and cannot be modified. If <00000> is entered instead of a function code, the standard function code becomes active. In menu 630, all keys are reset to the standard function code by pressing and <9>. _______________________________________________________________________ 7 - 156 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- Overview of keyboard function codes Code 12 32768 - 33023 33024 - 33039 33280 - 33283 33344 33345 33346 33347 33348 33538 33539 33540 33541 33542 33543 33544 33546 33548 33580 33588 33589 34066 34069 6.111.98.5.01.18 Function Paper feed Direct PLU key 1 - 256 Direct operator key 1 - 16 Fixed tare key 1 - 4 VAT key 1 VAT key 2 VAT key 3 VAT key 4 VAT key 5 Tare Subtotal Total Constant Manual Minus Cancellation Multiplication Switch from PLU input to price input Set scale to zero Operator tare Save operator tare Date key Print key 7 7 - 157 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.15 Keyboard selection .......................................................... Pr631 Select 631 confirm Pr631 Enter 7 00= 01= 02= 03= selection 03 84-keyboard standard 84-keyboard with 24 self-service frame 84-keyboard with 30-front foil 84-keyboard reprogrammed. (e.g. keyboard changes from host) Depending on the country, additional settings can be made for the 500 version. 10= Standard 84-keyboard with additional 48-keyboard 11= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with additional 48-keyboard 12= 84-keyboard with 30-self-service frame with additional 48-keyboard 13= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additional 48-keyboard 20= Standard 84-keyboard with additional 96-keyboard 21= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with additional 96-keyboard 22= 84-keyboard with 30-self-service frame with additional 96-keyboard 23= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additional 96-keyboard confirm Keyboards, see page 5 - 7 7 - 158 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.16 RAM clearing .................................................................... Pr 666 Select 666 Pr666 confirm 00 Pr666 81 Enter 81 7 confirm RAM is cleared _______________________________________________________________________ The following settings remain even after the RAM clearing: - Communication settings in Pr 600 - Printer settings in Pr 710 - Machine ID Pr 605 - Commissioning (memory management). The values set in Pr 606 are applied. _______________________________________________________________________ 7.21.17 Entering password for menu ........................................... Pr 690 Select 690 PASS confirm PASS Enter password 000000 000000 = Password is deactivated XXXXXX= Enter 6 numbers confirm Password entry is activated. If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 159 Programming Operating instruction BC II Commissioning Pr 6-- 7.21.18 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting .............. Pr 695 Select 695 confirm Pr695 01 Enter submenu 7 Submenu overview: 01= Change main currency to second currency (Euro) 02= Convert PLU price into EURO confirm Changing main currency to second currency (Euro) Submenu 01 Pr695 01 0 Enter selection 0= Main currency in old local currency 1= Main currency in new local currency confirm Converting PLU price into EURO Submenu 02 _______________________________________________________________________ This function can only be executed if the old local currency is still active. The sales are not converted. Sales should be deleted. _______________________________________________________________________ Pr695 02 1 confirm The prices are converted and the second currency is then changed to automatically. 7 - 160 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- 7.22 Service menu Pr 7-- _______________________________________________________________________ Test print Pr 700 Print boot log information Pr 701 Print fonts Pr702 Print menu settings Pr703 Print weighing system information Pr 704 Printer settings Pr 710 DisplayADC programming version Pr 712 Display load cell type Pr 715 Program version Pr 716 Display battery voltage Pr717 Display test Pr718 Logbook monitoring Pr 730 _______________________________________________________________________ 7.22.1 Test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700 Select 700 confirm confirm Fig. 100: Test printing 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 161 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Service Pr 7-- 7.22.2 Printing boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701 Select 701 confirm confirm 7 Fig. 101: Example of log information 7 - 162 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- 7.22.3 Printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr702 Select 702 Pr702 1 confirm Print with ticket paper confirm 7 All fonts are printed. Print with labels confirm The first 4 fonts are printed. Fig. 102: Font types confirm The next 4 fonts are printed. Press the key as often as required until all font types have been printed. 7.22.4 Printing menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703 Select 703 confirm Pr703 0 confirm The current menu settings are being printed. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 163 Programming Operating instruction BC II Service Pr 7-- 7.22.5 Printing weighing system information Select 704 confirm ............................ Pr 704 Pr704 0 confirm Weighing system information is printed. 7 Fig. 103: Weighing system information 7 - 164 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- 7.22.6 Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710 Select 710 confirm Enter submenu Pr710 01 confirm 7 Submenu overview: 01 = Feed for labels (+/- 1.5mm) 02= Move print format on the label (+/- 1.5mm) 03= Correct ticket feed (+/- 2.5mm) 04= Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket Feed for labels Submenu 01 Enter selection Pr710 01 12 00-1 1= minus infeed 12= Standard settings 13-24 = plus infeed confirm Moving print format on the label Submenu 02 Enter selection Pr710 02 12 00-1 1= minus infeed 12= Standard settings 13-24 = plus infeed confirm 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 165 Programming Operating instruction BC II Service Pr 7-- Correcting ticket feed Submenu 03 Pr710 03 20 Enter selection 00-19 = minus infeed 20= Standard settings 21-40 = plus infeed confirm 7 Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket In the case of printers with light barriers (label printer) this is where sensitivity for paper-end detection is set. When the end of the paper is reached, printing is automatically interrupted and the display shows the message ”PAPER END”. Submenu 04 Pr710 04 40 Enter selection 00= End of paper detection off 40= Standard increasingly insensitive .. 99= insensitive confirm Changing print intensity Legibility of rotated barcodes can be improved by reducing the print intensity. Submenu 05 Enter selection 0= 1= 2= 3= Pr710 05 0 no reduction Reduce print intensity by 10% Reduce print intensity by 20% Reduce print intensity by 30% confirm 7 - 166 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- 7.22.7 Displaying ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712 Select 712 confirm Pr712 6026500004 7.22.8 Displaying load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715 Select 715 confirm Pr715 Cod 6.111.98.5.01.18 150502 1 7 - 167 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Service Pr 7-- 7.22.9 Displaying program version ............................................ Pr 716 Select 716 confirm Enter submenu Pr716 01 confirm 7 Submenu overview: 01= Main program version number 02= Bootloader version number 03= Option resource version number 04= Layout resource version number 05= Menu resource version number 06= Text resource version number 07= Keyboard resource version number 08= Font resource version number 09= Software version number (SAP number) Main program version number Submenu 01 Bootloader version number Submenu 02 Option resource version number Submenu 03 Layout resource version number Submenu 04 Menu resource version number Submenu 05 Text resource version number Submenu 06 Keyboard resource version number Submenu 07 Font resource version number Submenu 08 Software version number Submenu 7 - 168 09 Pr716 01 00661117100140 Pr716 02 00061119500110 Pr716 03 00161117200140 Pr716 04 00061117300150 Pr716 05 00061117400140 Pr716 06 00061117500130 Pr716 07 00061117600110 Pr716 08 00061117700120 Pr716 09 61117000140 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- 7.22.10 Displaying battery voltage ............................................... Pr 717 Select 717 Pr717 1 confirm confirm Pr717 12,218 _______________________________________________________________________ If the scale is connected to the mains, the supply voltage (approx. 12 V) is displayed. - Disconnect scale from mains supply! The battery voltage is displayed. _______________________________________________________________________ 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 169 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Service Pr 7-- 7.22.11 Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718 Select 718 confirm Pr718 1 confirm The display shows all figures and symbols. 7 Fig. 104: Display test Close display test 7 - 170 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- 7.22.12 Logbook control Pr 730 In menu Pr 730, Welmec information from the logbook can be queried. Select 730 confirm Enter submenu 01= Display logbook 02= Print logbook Pr730 01 7 confirm Display logbook Submenu 01 Step 1 Software identification number. (Software ID) Accessing information Entries from installation are displayed in three steps. Consecutive number of log book entry, Department number, Component number. Version number of the loaded software. Date and time of download. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 171 Programming Operating instruction BC II Service Pr 7-- Example: Accessing logbook entries Pr Press key. Press the keys <7> <3> <0> on Pr730 10-digit keyboard. 7 Press key Pr730 01 1 Press key Pr730 01 1 Press key Enter<>. for step 1 1 Software ID 2 Version number of legally relevant part 3 Version number of legally non-relevant part Pr730 A10F 002 0200 1 2 3 Press key Enter < for further steps.> 1 Serial number of the entry 2 Department number 3 Component number 1 Software ID 2 Version number of legally relevant part 3 Version number of legally non-relevant part 1 Date DDMMYY 2 Time 7 - 172 Pr730 9 20 1 12 2 3 Pr730 A10F 002 0200 1 2 3 Pr730 140910 1 1058 2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Service Pr 7-- If there are further entries in the logbook, the next entry is displayed. 1 Serial number of the entry 2 Department number 3 Component number 1 Pr730 8 20 1 2 12 3 Pr730 bc 01 001 0170 Version number of the loaded software 7 1 1 Date 2 Time Pr730 090410 1432 1 2 Hold down the key until all logbook entries are displayed. Once all entries are displayed, the scale shows the next submenu. Pr730 02 Print logbook Requirement - Receipt paper is in the printer. - Pr 505 -0 Ticket paper Submenu 02 confirm 1 Logbook is printed. Serial number of the entry 2 Department number 3 Component number 4 Version number of the loaded software 5 Date 6 Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fig. 105: Logbook printout 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 173 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7.23 Programming overview Menus marked with an asterisk *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all country versions. 7 PLU maintenance Menu Define PLU Enter PLU number Pr 110 Sub. see page 7 - 43 Unit price 01 7 - 44 Product group 02 7 - 44 Tare 03 7 - 44 Use-by date 04 7 - 45 Barcode for article 05 7 - 45 Price overwrite 0= not permissible 1= permissible 06 7 - 46 Article type 0= weighed 1= manual 2= minus 3= By count (price refers to pieces per package) 4= Fixed weight 5= By count fixed weight (fixed weight and price refer to pieces per package) 07 7 - 46 Weight class 0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb 1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb 08 7 - 47 Data of origin 0= without data of origin 1= with data of origin 09 7 - 47 Enter PLU product text (PLU number 0001-9999) Traceability text (number 9900-9999) 10 7 - 47 Supplementary text XX - YYYYYYYYY XX= Supplementary text 01-04 YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200 11 7 - 48 Supplementary text for BLD text fields XX YYYYYYYYY XX= Supplementary text 01-10 YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200 12 7 - 48 Logo printing in BLD logo fields 1 - 3 13 7 - 49 7 - 174 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview PLU maintenance Menu Sub. see page Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes 00 to 99 Pr 110 14 7 - 49 Unit price back-calculation 0= without back calculation 1= with back-calculation (the unit price per piece or for fixed weight per kg is calculated) 15 7 - 50 Mandatory input of pieces 0= no mandatory input 1= with mandatory input 16 7 - 50 Fixed weight 00000-99999 17 7 - 50 Fixed weight mode (A second representation is also printed in brackets) 0= Standard 1= lbs (g) 2= oz (lbs) 3= oz (g) 4= lbs (oz) 18 7 - 50 Mandatory input of fixed weight 0= no mandatory input 1= with mandatory input 19 7 - 51 Assign VAT number to a PLU 1-5 20 7 - 51 VAT can be overwritten 0= cannot be overwritten 1= can be overwritten 21 7 - 51 Tare % 22 7 - 52 7 000.00 (dependent on country) Print PLU (article) lists Pr 115 7 - 53 Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with all product lines 01 7 - 53 Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with only the first product line 02 7 - 53 Delete single PLUs (article) Pr 120 7 - 54 Delete PLUs (article) from xxxxxx to yyyyyy Pr 121 7 - 54 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 175 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview Data maintenance Menu Sub. see page Supplement. texts enter text number 1-999999999 Pr 200 7 - 55 Pr 201 7 - 56 Define scrolling message Enter text number 01-99 Pr 202 7 - 57 Print texts Pr 205 7 - 58 Create supplementary text Create header and footer texts Enter text number 01-99 Create header and footer texts 7 Print supplementary texts 01 Print header and footer texts 02 Print scrolling message 03 Delete texts Pr 206 7 - 59 Delete single supplementary text 01 Delete all supplementary texts 02 Delete header and footer texts 03 Delete scrolling message text 04 Define barcode structure Pr 210 7 - 60 7 - 61 Barcode format 01 Code constant 02 7 - 62 Numerical codes 03 7 - 62 Check and adopt code structure 04 7 - 64 Managing barcode structures Pr 211 7 - 65 Print code structures 01 7 - 65 Delete code structures 02 7 - 65 Code structure number for all PLUs 03 7 - 66 Module width for barcode in 0º and 180º position 04 7 - 66 Module width for barcode in 90º and 270º position 05 7 - 66 7 - 176 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Data maintenance Menu Non-PLU settings Pr 215 Sub. see page 7 - 67 Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) 01 7 - 67 Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles 02 7 - 68 Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 03 7 - 68 Barcode for non-PLU minus products 04 7 - 68 Barcode for total 05 7 - 68 Product group for non-PLU weighed 06 7 - 69 Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece goods) 07 7 - 69 Product groups for non-PLU minus articles 08 7 - 69 VAT for non-PLU weighed 09 7 - 70 VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods) 10 7 - 70 VAT for non-PLU minus articles 11 7 - 70 Define PLU number for non-PLU article 99 7 - 70 Print BLD label list/ logo list Pr 220 7 - 71 Print BLD label list 01 Print logos 02 Delete BLD labels/logos Pr 225 Delete BLD label list from - to 01 7 - 72 Delete BLD logos from - to 02 7 - 72 Define VAT Enter VAT number 1-5 Pr 230 7 - 72 VAT set 0-99,99 01 7 - 73 VAT inclusive or exclusive 0= VAT inclusive (gross prices) 1= VAT exclusive (net prices) 02 7 - 73 VAT text, 20 characters possible 03 Manage VAT Pr 231 Print list with VAT rates 0 01 Delete VAT sets 1...5 - 1...5 02 Use VAT: 0= Use VAT from PLU and non-PLU 1-5 = Use VAT for all articles 03 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 74 7 - 177 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Data maintenance Menu Configure report layout Pr 300 Sub. see page 7 - 75 Print prices 0= Prices are not printed 1= Prices are printed 01 7 - 75 Print PLUs without sales 0= PLUs without sales are not printed 1= PLUs without sales are printed 02 7 - 75 Printcustomer name for PLU report 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number 03 7 - 75 Print customer name for product group report 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number 04 Print customer name for operator report 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number 05 Print customer name for total sales per scale and per operator report 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number 06 Print customer name for data of origin report 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number 07 Print customer name for VAT report 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number 08 7 - 178 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Data maintenance Menu Print reports on ticket Pr 310 Sub. see page 7 - 77 Scale report 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 01 7 - 77 PLU report with one article text line 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 02 7 - 77 PLU report with all article text lines 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 03 7 - 78 Product group report 04 7 - 79 Operator report 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 05 7 - 80 Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text line 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 06 7 - 81 Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text lines 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 07 7 - 81 VAT sales report 0= Print report, no delete 1= Print and delete report 08 7 - 82 Print report on label 7 Pr 311 Print scale total sales 7 - 82 01 Display / delete sales Pr 320 7 - 82 7 - 83 Display scale total sales 01 7 - 83 Delete scale total sales 02 7 - 83 99 7 - 83 Delete journal from device 6.111.98.5.01.18 90= delete 7 - 179 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Set date and time Pr 500 Sub. see page 7 - 84 Setting date 01 7 - 85 Setting time 02 7 - 85 Print year either 2 or 4-digital 0= Year with 2 digits 1= Year with 4 digits 03 7 - 85 Date representation variants 00= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.06 01= Day-month-year alphanumeric e.g 21.07.06 02= Day-month alphanumeric e.g 21 July 03= Month-year alphanumeric e.g July06 04= Month Day Year American numeric 05= Month Day Year American alphanumeric 06= Year month day Hungarian numeric 07= Year month day Hungarian alphanumeric 08= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.06 09= Day month year alphanumeric e.g. 21 July 06 04 7 - 86 Set main operating mode Pr 510 7 - 87 Select main operating mode 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start 01 7 - 87 Select layout 0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout 02 7 - 87 Addition of customer total 0 = without addition of customer total 1 = with addition of customer total 03 7 - 88 Select paper type 0= Ticket paper 1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer) 04 7 - 88 7 - 180 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Configuration Menu Set switching operating mode Pr 511 Sub. see page 7 - 89 Select switching operating mode 01= Multi-operator mode 02= Self-service mode 03= Quick-service mode 04= Price labeling with manual triggering 05= Price labeling with automatic start 01 7 - 89 Select layout 0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper) 1= Label layout 02 7 - 89 Addition of customer total 0 = without addition of customer total 1 = with addition of customer total 03 7 - 90 Select paper type 0= Ticket paper 1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer) 04 7 - 90 Settings for different operating modes 7 Pr 515 7 - 90 Automatic zero setting 0= Scale is set to zero. 1= Zero setting error 115 is displayed 2= Scale is not set to zero. 01 7 - 90 Open tickets / labels 0= Open tickets are printed after scale off/on 1= Open tickets are not printed and deleted 02 7 - 91 Origin labeling 0= Origin labeling off 1= Enter data of origin number manually 2= Data of origin number permanently defined 03 Define data of origin number 00-99 Use permanently defined data of origin number. 04 Negative customer total permitted/not permitted 0= The total cannot become negative during sale 1= the total can become negative during sale 05 7 - 91 Sales calculation 0= The sold items are not added to total memory 1= The sold items are added to total memory 06 7 - 92 Mandatory input for By count pieces 0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 16) 1= Mandatory input for by count piece 07 Mandatory input for fixed weight 0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 19) 1= Mandatory input for fixed weight 08 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 181 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Scrolling message setting Pr 516 Sub. 7 - 93 Select scrolling message 00= Scrolling message not active 01-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202 01 Display on 0= Customer side 1= Operator side 2= Both sides 02 Activation of scrolling message 0= When display is occupied and empty 1= Only when display is empty 03 Test scrolling message 04 Settings for multi-operator mode see page Pr 520 7 - 94 Constant key function 0= Only fix the unit price during sale 1= Only fix the tare value during sale 2= Fix unit price and tare value during sale 01 Print article and total label 0= Print article labels and total label 1= Only print total label 2= Only print article labels 02 7 - 95 Operator items display mode 000 1= Display for sheet cancellation 1= Display after registration 1= Display for total/subtotal 03 7 - 96 Cash register functions 0= Cash drawer does not open 1= Cash register opens with/without sale using total and operator key 2= Cash register opens only with sale using total and operator key 3= Cash register opens with sale using total and operator key 4= Cash register opens only with sale using total and operator key 04 Amount tend./change operation 0= without amount tend./change operation 1= Amount tend./change operation with a currency 2= Combined amount tend./change operation in local cur‐ rency and foreign currency * 05 7 - 182 7 - 97 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Configuration Menu Sub. see page Talon printout 00= without talon 01-99= with talon the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds Pr 520 06 7 - 97 Repeat ticket 0= without repeat ticket 1= with repeat ticket 07 Open ticket again 0= without ticket reopening 1= with ticket reopening 08 Print cancellation and canceled articles 0= no printout 1= with printout 09 7 - 99 Print included VAT 0= no printout 1= with printout 10 7 - 99 Print ticket after 0= Print ticket as requested with +) 1= Always print ticket 11 7 - 99 Setting for quick service mode Pr 521 0 =Article accessing via PLU-direct key, registration with operator key. 1= Article call-up via PLU direct key, automatic recor‐ ding. 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 7 - 100 7 - 183 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Settings for price labeling mode * Pr 525 Sub. 7 - 101 Labeling mode 0= Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported. 1= Weight labeling Label print with selling price ”0.00” is possible. 2= Only Weight labeling Label print with selling price ”0.00” is possible. 01 Multiple label printing for price per piece 00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay. 01 - 99= Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay. 02 Allocate operator no. to operator keys TT-VVV TT (keys 1-16) VVV (operator 1-999) 7 - 184 Pr 530 see page 7 - 103 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Configuration Menu PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535 Sub. see page 7 - 103 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input 0 = Unit price via 10-key keypad Switching to PLU input with shift key 1 = PLU no. input via 10-key keypad Switching to unit price input with shift key 2= PLU no. input only via 10-key keypad 01 PLU input: Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. 2= PLU input with 2 digits 3= PLU input with 3 digits 4= PLU input with 4 digits 5= PLU input with 5 digits 6= PLU input with 6 digits 02 PLU-direct key mode 0= PLU-key no. (PLU direct keyboard) corresponds to the PLU no. 1= PLU direct keyboard is locked 2= PLU number results from the PLU key allocation, see sub 4 03 PLU direct key allocation XXX-YYYYYY XXX= PLU direct key 001-246 YYYYYY= PLU number 001-999999 04 PLU range limitation 000001-999999 05 7 - 105 PLU call delay time 0= PLU is displayed with or after entering all di‐ gits. 1-20 = The PLU is displayed after a delay time. 1= short delay; 20= long delay 06 7 - 106 7 - 104 Print PLU direct keys Pr 536 7 - 107 Tare fixed value memory 1-4 X-YYYY X= Direct tare key 1-4 YYYY= Assigned tare values Pr 540 7 - 108 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 185 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Rounding and price calculation settings for national currency Pr 545 Sub. see page 7 - 108 Rounding methods for customer total 0= no rounding 1= rounding down to 5 2= rounding down to 10 3= rounding down to 50 4= rounding down to 100 5= mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9= mathematical rounding to 100* 01 7 - 109 Rounding of article total 0= no rounding 1= rounding down to 5 2= rounding down to 10 3= rounding down to 50 4= rounding down to 100 5= mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9= mathematical rounding to 100* 02 7 - 109 Rounding for By count 0= mathematical 1= round up next position 03 7 - 186 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Configuration Menu Sub. Receipt design overview Design ticket see page 7 - 111 Pr 550 7 - 112 Print barcode on ticket 000 1= Article barcode on; 0= off 1= Total barcode on; 0= off 1= Talon barcode on; 0= off 01 Barcode height in mm on ticket 5-22 mm 02 7 - 112 Print tare on ticket 0= Do not print tare value on ticket 1= Tare value net weight is identified with N (country-de‐ pendent character) 2= Tare value on ticket net weight is not identified with N 03 7 - 113 Print header text 00= without header text 01-99 = Header text number 04 Print footer text 00= without footer text 01-99 = Footer text number 05 Foreign currency supplementary text 000000000= without foreign currency supplementary text 1-999999999 = Foreign currency supplementary text number 06 7 - 114 Rounding supplementary text 000000000= without rounding supplementary text 1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number 07 7 - 114 Font change on tickets 000= Font from PLU 001-1 10= Defined font 08 Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket 0= all article text lines are printed 1-9 = the corresponding number of lines is printed 10= text lines not printed 09 Ticket counter printout 0= Counter is not printed 1= Counter is printed 10 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 115 7 - 187 7 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Sub. see page Print foreign currency 0000 1= Print conversion rate 1= Print unit price, selling price and total 1= Print selling price and total 1= Only print total Pr 550 11 7 - 116 Print amount paid in/out 0= No printout 1= Printout 12 7 - 116 Print supplementary texts 0= No printout 1= Printout 13 7 - 116 Print header logo 0000 = No printout 1-9999 = Print logo with specified ID 14 7 - 117 Print footer logo 0= No printout 1-9999 = Print logo with specified ID 15 7 - 117 Label design - overview 7 - 118 BLD labels 7 - 119 Design label Pr 555 7 - 120 Label type 00= label from BLD 01 ... predefined label from scales 01 7 - 121 Select BLD label Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01 1.. Select BLD label. 02 7 - 122 Label size HHH-WW HHH= Label height 28-105 mm WW= Label width 10-58 mm 03 Change label distance 8-40 dot ( 8dot= 1mm) 04 Packed-on and sell-by date on label 00 1= Packed-on date on; 0= off 1= Sell-by date on; 0= off 05 7 - 122 Barcode on label 00 1= Article barcode on; 0= off 1= Total barcode on; 0= off 06 7 - 123 7 - 188 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Configuration Menu Sub. Barcode height in mm 5 - 22mm Pr 555 07 see page Tara printout on label 0= without tare 1= with tare 08 Print header text 00= without header text 01-99 = header text number 09 7 - 124 Alternative text with sell-by date 000000000= No alternative text. 1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text 10 7 - 124 Logo printout enter 0000= without logo 0001-9999 = Logo ID (print logo) 11 7 - 124 Beginning of text field Beginning of text field in mm 11 - 84 12 7 - 125 Beginning of data field Beginning of data field in mm 11 - 84 13 Data field monitoring 0= off 1= active 14 7 - 126 Font change on tickets 0= Font from PLU 1= fixed font 15 7 - 127 16 7 - 127 Print price frame and texts on label: 1= Print ”TARE” 1= Print ”Packed on” 1= Print ”best before” 1= Print ”Net” or ”Pcs” 1= Print ”Price” 1= Print price frame 1= Print supplementary text 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 0000000 7 - 189 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Sub. see page Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit on label 0= without output 1= with operator no. 2= with machine ID 3= with digit code * Pr 555 17 7 - 127 Print foreign currency: 0000 1= Print conversion rate 1= Print unit price, selling price and total 1= Print selling price and total 1= Only print total 18 7 - 128 Rotate label layout by 180o and reverse operation 11 1= Print label rotated 1= Reverse label before printing 19 Alternative text for packed-on date 0= Standard text from resource 1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200 20 7 - 130 Alternative text for use-by date 0= Standard text from resource 1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200 21 7 - 130 Print units on the label 1111 1= Print price with unit 1= Print unit price with unit 1= Print weight with unit 1= Print tare with unit 22 7 - 130 Print speed for label layout 00= 44 mm/s 01= 53 mm/s (battery operation) 02= 66 mm/s 03= 88 mm/s 04= 102 mm/s (Standard) 23 7 - 130 7 - 190 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Configuration Menu Label configuration management Pr 556 Sub. 7 - 131 Save configuration from 555 1-3 Layout memory is only possible if memory is deleted (556 / 03) 01 Select label configuration 0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing 1= Configuration from memory 1 2= Configuration from memory 2 3= Configuration from memory 3 02 Delete label configuration Delete memory 1-3 03 Foreign currency settings 7 - 132 7 Pr 560 * 7 - 133 Select foreign currency function 0= Euro/foreign currency off 1= Euro function on 2= Foreign currency function on 01 Select foreign/ second currency display 0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-operational) 1= Foreign currency display on Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and total in amount tend./change operation 02 Foreign currency calculation method 0= Total calculated through conversion 1= Total calculated through addition of selling price 03 Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout 04 Foreign currency symbol on label for price field 05 Decimal places in foreign currency 0-3 decimal places 06 Foreign currency factor 0-4 Factor 1 / 10 / 100 / 1000 /10000 07 6.111.98.5.01.18 see page 7 - 134 7 - 135 7 - 191 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Configuration Menu Sub. Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) e.g. 0001.01 (national unit e.g. €) Pr 560 08 see page Rounding of foreign currency 0= no rounding 1= rounding down to 5 2= rounding down to 10 3= rounding down to 50 4= rounding down to 100 5= mathematical rounding to 5* 6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7= mathematical rounding to 25* 8= mathematical rounding to 50* 9= mathematical rounding to 100* 09 7 - 135 Calculation of foreign currency price 0= Internal calculation in foreign currency 1= Internal calculation in national currency. 10 7 - 136 Ticket call-up data volume 111 1= Transfer of total EAN code. 0= without 1= Transfer of Item EAN code. 0= without 1= Transfer of article text. 0= without 7 - 192 Pr 570 7 - 136 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Database configuration Menu TCP-IP settings Pr 600 Sub. 7 - 137 DHCP 0= No DHCP, use permanent IP addresses 1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server. 01 Display of current IP address 02 IP: IP address if no DHCP selected 03 Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected 04 Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected 05 DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected 06 DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected 07 Enter host name 32 ASCII characters are possible. 08 Leasing address from DHCP 09 Display current IP address Pr 601 Printout of communication settings Pr 602 Set scale number 01 - 32 Pr 603 Set department no 001-999 Pr 604 Set machine ID 0001 - 9999 Pr 605 6.111.98.5.01.18 see page 7 - 138 7 7 - 139 7 - 140 7 - 142 7 - 193 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview Database configuration Menu Commissioning (memory management). Pr 606 Number of PLUs 100 - 10000 see page 7 - 142 01 7 - 144 02 7 - 144 03 7 - 144 Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 0 - 3 04 7 - 144 Number of supplementary texts 50- 3000 05 7 - 144 Number of items (ticket memory) 50- 3000 06 7 - 145 By count, fixed weight and VAT 0000 1= By count on; 0= off 1= Fixed weight on; 0= off 1= VAT activated; 0= deactivated 1= Tare % permitted, 0= Tare % not permitted (depen‐ dent on country) 07 7 - 145 Decimal places 0-3 = Number of decimal places 4= Standard value (dependent on country) 08 7 - 145 Expanded RAM, 0 = do not use, 1 = use 09 7 - 146 Journal function 0= Ticket journal off 1= Ticket journal on 10 7 - 146 Start commissioning 88 7 - 147 Number of supplementary texts per PLU Number of BLD text fields per PLU 7 Sub. 0-4 00 - 10 Set scale for system (as from program version 2.00) Pr 607 7 - 148 Scale type 0= Stand alone; 1= Slave; 9= Master 01 7 - 148 Multicast IP address 02 7 - 149 Multicast IP port number 03 7 - 149 UDP port number 04 7 - 149 7 - 194 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Database configuration Menu Sub. Control display lighting 00= automatic display illumination off 1-99 = automatic display illumination on Pr 610 7 - 150 Scales switch-off time 1-99 in minutes Pr 615 7 - 151 WLAN settings Settings 02-07 only possible if WLAN module is switched off (Pr 621/01) Pr 621 7 Module on/off 0= WLAN off 1= WLAN on 01 Time slices for WLAN on/off in a defined period of time X-YYYYYYYY X= 1-3 time slices YYYYYYYY= Time on/off 02 Ping interval 0000= Ping off 0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec. Start of ping interval, when WLAN on (Pr 621/01) 03 IP address for WLAN 000000000000 04 Test telegram to host 0= Transmission off 0001-9999 = Interval between 2 transmissions in sec. 05 IP address of telegram recipient 000000000000 06 Port number of telegram recipient 0001-65536 (standard= 49152) 07 Beeper on/off 000 1= Normal beeper on; 0= off 1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off 1= Error beeper on; 0= off 6.111.98.5.01.18 see page Pr 622 7 - 195 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Database configuration Menu Sub. Scale (display) sensitivity 0-5 0= Display sensitive .. 5= Display less sensitive against vibrations Pr 625 7 - 155 Reconfigure keyboard Pr 630 7 - 156 Keyboard selection Pr 631 00= 84-keyboard standard 01= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame 02= 84-keyboard with 30 front foil 03= 84-keyboard, reprogrammed 10= Standard 84-keyboard with additional 48-keyboard 11= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with addi‐ tional 48-keyboard 12= 84-keyboard with 30-self-service frame with addi‐ tional 48-keyboard 13= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additio‐ nal 48-keyboard 20= Standard 84-keyboard with additional 96-keyboard 21= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with addi‐ tional 96-keyboard 22= 84-keyboard with 30-self-service frame with addi‐ tional 96-keyboard 23= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additio‐ nal 96-keyboard 7 - 158 Clear RAM 81 RAM is cleared Pr 666 7 - 159 Enter password for menu XXXXXX 6-digit numeric password 000000 Password is deactivated Pr 690 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695 7 - 160 Change main currency to second currency 0= Main currency in old local currency 1= Main currency in new local currency 01 Convert PLU price into Euro 02 7 - 196 see page 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Programming Programming overview Service Menu Sub. see page Test printing Pr 700 7 - 161 Print boot log information Pr 701 7 - 161 Print fonts Pr 702 7 - 163 Print menu settings Pr 703 7 - 163 Print weighing system information Pr 704 7 - 164 Printer settings Pr 710 7 - 165 Infeed for labels 00 - 11 = minus feed 12 Standard settings 13-24 plus infeed 01 Move print format on the label 00 - 11 = minus feed 12 Standard settings 13-24 plus infeed 02 7 - 165 Correct ticket feed 00-19 minus feed 20 Standard settings 21-40 plus infeed 03 7 - 166 Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket 00-99 (the higher the number, the less sensitive is detec‐ tion) 00= Paper end detection off 40= Standard settings 04 Change print intensity 0= no reduction 1= Reduce print intensity by 10% 2= Reduce print intensity by 20% 3= Reduce print intensity by 30% 05 Display ADC program version Pr 712 Detailed display Pr 714 Display ADC type Pr 715 6.111.98.5.01.18 7 7 - 167 7 - 167 7 - 197 Programming Operating instruction BC II Programming overview 7 Service Menu Display program version Pr 716 Sub. 7 - 168 Main program Version number 01 Boot loader Version number 02 Option ressource Version number 03 Layout ressource Version number 04 Menu ressource Version number 05 Text ressource Version number 06 Keyboard ressource Version number 07 Font ressource 08 Version number SAP number see page 09 Display battery voltage Pr 717 7 - 169 Display test Pr 718 7 - 170 Logbook monitoring Pr 730 7 - 171 Display logbook 01 7 - 172 Print logbook 02 7 - 173 7 - 198 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 8 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting You can generally eliminate the errors specified below yourself, using the described remedy. In the case of errors which you cannot eliminate yourself and which are not described in this Operating Manual, please call your Bizerba customer service point. Please provide your Bizerba customer service point with the following details: - Device type (see type plate) - Device no. (see type plate) - Error description This will facilitate preparations by customer service staff. 8.1 8 Fault description Fault Display does not illumi‐ nate. Cause No supply voltage. Rectification Check and insert power cable. Check connection plug Check connection cable Press On-Off key Weight value display not Load plate not correctly posi‐ at zero or modified. tioned or objects located on the load plate. Clean load plate, position cor‐ rectly and remove objects. Soiling on or beneath the load plate. Level scale. Scale not leveled. Switch scale off/on. Printer will not print. Open print head. Connect print head correctly (see page 5 - 10). Printer jammed. Drive motor for paper trans‐ port overloaded or jammed. Check paper track and re‐ move any detached labels. Clean printer (paper guide). Poor receipt or label printing. 6.111.98.5.01.18 Unsuitable receipt or label pa‐ Clean thermal strip. per. 8-1 Troubleshooting 8.2 Operating instruction BC II Messages Operating errors or faults in the electronics are indicated by ”Cod” and an error code digit. Display Cod 1 1 2 kg T kg Price / kg Price Cause Messages 8 Rectification Cod 112 Movement of the scale during start-up. Do not move the scale! Cod 110 Scale loaded during start-up. Unload scales! Cod 110 Scale below zero during start-‐ Fit load plate! up. Cod 110 Scale below zero after start-‐ up. Fit load plate and press key! Error 073 Scale sales overflow. Print and delete sales, see menus Pr 310, Pr 311 and Pr 320 PAPErEND End of paper insert new ticket paper or new label roll. incorrect setting Check setting in Pr 505. 0= Receipt paper 1=Label paper --- Press key or switch the scale off and on again with the key. Other error code digits 8-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 9 Maintenance Maintenance 9.1 Cleaning The cleaning instructions must be observed during installation, operation and maintenance. 9.1.1 Cleaning device _______________________________________________________________________ DANGER Water getting into device! Danger of death from electric shock. - Make sure that no water runs into the device when cleaning. - Do not wash device off or spray-wash. 9 _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ CAUTION Incorrect cleaning agents! Damage of device surfaces. - Do not use spirit, acetone or aggressive cleaning or scouring agents. _______________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________ Switch off device before cleaning and pull out power plug. _______________________________________________________________________ Use warm water with dish-washing detergent (food safe) for cleaning. Use a soft, non-fraying cloth, moistened lightly. 6.111.98.5.01.18 9-1 Maintenance 9.1.2 Operating instruction BC II Cleaning the printer Clean thermal bar Ticket printer, label printer or Linerless printer. The thermal printhead must be cleaned on a regular basis and as soon as you notice that the printing quality has decreased. _______________________________________________________________________ ATTENTION Coated thermal bar! The thermal bar is coated with a glass passivation layer and must not be touched or cleaned with hard objects. Use Bizerba cleaning products to clean the thermal bar. _______________________________________________________________________ 9 1 Open the side cover of the scale. Open the printer cover by pulling it upwards. Open the printhead. Clean the thermal bar 1 with the Bizerba thermal printhead cleaning pen or dip a cleaning pad in Bizerba cleaning solvent.. Afterwards, dry off with a dry cleaning bud. Fig. 106: Thermal bar 9-2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Maintenance Clean label printer Inspect label printer weekly for glue residue deposits on deflection pin, take-up arbor and paper deflector and clean. Clean the deflection pin and take-up pin. 1 Open the printer cover and printhead. Remove the label roll. Remove glue from parts 1 . 1 9 Fig. 107: Deflection pin, take-up pin Clean paper deflector Pull the paper deflector out sideways. 2 Clean the paper deflector with the LR label remover, from Bizerba. The ”LR-label remover” may not be used to clean thermal bars. 2 Fig. 108: Paper deflector Push the paper deflector 6.111.98.5.01.18 2 in sideways. 9-3 Maintenance 9.1.3 Operating instruction BC II Cleaning products for printer Ordering information The cleaning products can be obtained from Bizerba Service or Bizerba technical consultants. Cleaner for thermal bar Cleaning pen 12ml Order no.: 5077 7050000 or 9 Aerosol can, 200ml Order no.: 9400 8900133 Thermal bar cleaning set consisting of: 5 cleaning buds made of wood with leather coating 1 pcs. IPA cleaning solvent 12 ml Order no.: 9400 8919 000 Moisten the tip of the cleaning bud with a few drops of the cleaning solvent. Clean the thermal bar immediately with cleaning bud. 9-4 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Maintenance Cleaner for residues of glue from labels _______________________________________________________________________ ATTENTION Thermal bar coating and rubber rollers! Damage to the coating - Do not use label remover for cleaning thermal bar and rubber-covered roll! _______________________________________________________________________ Label remover Aerosol can, 200ml Order no.: 9594 3000000 9 6.111.98.5.01.18 9-5 Maintenance 9.2 Operating instruction BC II Maintenance The load plate must be removed every 4 weeks and loose dirt removed with a brush or vacuum cleaner. Replace the load plate and check the zero point of the scale. Switch the scale off and on if necessary. 9.2.1 Testing the weight display Place reference weight of 2x3 kg on the scale and read off the display at 3 and 6kg. This test must be repeated at regular intervals. 9.2.2 9 Note on storing thermal paper Store unprinted thermal paper without direct light exposure to light (original packaging) in closed box or similar, if possible. It keeps its printability for up to 5 years if stored at max. 60 oC and at a max. of 65% relative air humidity. Printed thermal paper is readable for up to 10 years if not exposed to direct sunlight and if kept at temperatures up to a maximum of 30 o C and at a maximum of 65% relative air humidity. 9.2.3 Ticket, label and Linerless rollers To avoid faults in the device, only ticket and label rolls may be used that have been checked and approved by Bizerba.These ticket and label rollers are identified with a corresponding number. We are not liable for damage/faults that are produced from using ticket and label rolls that have not been checked and approved by Bizerba. Therefore, please order ticket, labels and Linerless rolls only at a Bizerba sales agent near you: Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG Papier und Etiketten Harpener Hellweg 31 44805 Bochum 1 Germany Phone: +49 234 / 9557-0 FAX: +49 234 / 5070247 9-6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II 10 Technical data 10.1 Dimensions Technical data Scale BC II 800 L Length: W Width: H Overall height: H1 Complete height: 342 mm 462 mm 90 mm H1 512 mm H W 10 L Fig. 109: BC II 800 Scale BC II 100 L Length: 360 mm W Width: 432 mm H Overall height: 174 mm H W L Fig. 110: BC II 100 Scale BC II 200 L Length: 360 mm W Width: 487 mm H Overall height: 174 mm H1 Complete height: 461 mm H1 H W L Fig. 111: BC II 200 6.111.98.5.01.18 10 - 1 Technical data 10.2 Operating instruction BC II Power supply The electrical power supply must comply with the national requirements and tolerances. Technical data for the mains power supply Mains supply Single-phase A.C. voltage, see data on type plate. Permissible mains voltage tolerance (steady-state) normal: +6% to -10% of nominal value Supply frequency: 50/60 Hz 10 Permissible tolerance of mains frequency: +2% to -2% Permissible nonlinear distortion factor of supply voltage x 5% Protective conductor leakage current max.: 3.5 mA 10.3 Environmental conditions The following conditions must always be observed when using electronic retail scales, POS terminals, weighing and EDP systems, recording equipment and similar devices, equipment combinations and spare parts. For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions. Threshold values Device family Protection type in accordanc e with IP EDP systems: 20 +15 (+60) +30 (+87) -10 (+14) +43 (+109) Retail scales 20 -10 (+14) +40 (+104) -20 (-4) +60 (+140) External devices 1 Temperature Relative humidity% oC Celsius (degF Fahrenheit) Operation Storage Operation Storage min. max. min. max. min. max. min.max. 1 8 80 90 20 80 90 The threshold values of the respective manufacturer apply. Bedewing of equipment is not permitted 10 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Subject index A Addition of customer total, 7 - 88 Amount tend./change operation, 7 - 97 Release printout on ticket, 7 - 116 Article Assign barcode, 7 - 45 Assign product group, 7 - 44 Assign supplementary text, 7 - 48 Data of origin, 7 - 47 define, 7 - 43 Define article tare, 7 - 44 Define unit price, 7 - 44 delete, 7 - 54 Enter sell-by date, 7 - 45 Overwrite unit price, 7 - 46 Print article label, 7 - 95 Print list, 7 - 53 Report, 7 - 78 Rounding of article total, 7 - 109 Text, 7 - 47 Type, 7 - 46 Weight class, 7 - 47 Article maintenance, 7 - 42 Define PLU, 7 - 43 Assign VAT, to PLU, 7 - 38 Assisted sale with labels, 6 - 30 Assisted sales with ticket, 6 - 25 Automatic zero setting, 7 - 90 B Back-calculation, 7 - 50 Barcode, 7 - 16 Assign Code 128, 7 - 31 Barcode structure example for Code 128, 7 - 29 Barcode structure example, EAN 13, 7 - 22 Check and adopt code structure, 7 - 64 Code 128, 7 - 26 Code structure for all PLUs, 7 - 66 Define barcode structure, 7 - 61 Define structure, 7 - 61 Delete code structure, 7 - 65 6.111.98.5.01.18 Subject index EAN 13 structure example, 7 - 24 for article, 7 - 45 for non-PLU, 7 - 68 for PLU, 7 - 45 for total, 7 - 68 Height on label, 7 - 123 Height on ticket, 7 - 112 Instore code, Examples, 7 - 24 Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 20, 7 - 23 Instore code EAN 8, 7 - 25 manage, 7 - 65 Manufacturer code EAN 8, 7 - 19 Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 18 Overview, 7 - 16 Print barcode structure, 7 - 65 Print code structure, 7 - 65 Print code structures, 7 - 7 print on label, 7 - 123 print on ticket, 7 - 112 Basic price, programming, 7 - 44 Beeper, on/off, 7 - 154 BLD BLD label list, 7 - 7, 7 - 71 BLD logo fields, 7 - 49 Delete BLD labels, 7 - 72 Delete BLD logos, 7 - 72 Label example, 7 - 119 Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 - 144 Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 - 144 Select BLD labels, 7 - 122 Supplementary text for BLD text fields, 7 - 48 BLD (Bizerba Label Designer), 7 - 7, 7 - 48 By Count fixed weight, 7 - 50 Create, 7 - 36 Mandatory input of pieces, 6 - 43 Overview, 7 - 36 By-Count Back-calculation, 7 - 50 Create, 7 - 34 Database configuration, 7 - 33 Fixed weight mode, 7 - 50 Mandatory input, 7 - 50, 7 - 92 Overview, 7 - 33 11 - 1 11 Subject index Piece goods, 7 - 33 C Operating instruction BC II Customer total Addition, 7 - 88, 7 - 90 negative, 7 - 91 Rounding, 7 - 109 Cancellation, 6 - 12 Cash register Cash register drawer, 6 - 45 Cash register function, 7 - 96 Connect cash drawer, 4 - 4 Data field monitoring, 7 - 126 Check digit, print on label, 7 - 127 Data of origin, 7 - 47 automatic traceability no., 7 - 32 Manual input, 7 - 32 Sales report, 7 - 81 Clean label printer, 9 - 3 Date, Representation, 7 - 86 Cleaning, 9 - 1 Date / time, set, 7 - 84, 7 - 85 Cleaning printer, 9 - 2 Decimal places, 7 - 145 Cleaning products, 9 - 4 delete Header and footer texts, 7 - 59 Supplementary texts, 7 - 59 Change line, 7 - 11 11 D clear RAM, 7 - 159 Tare , 6 - 22 Delete memory, 7 - 159 Clear RAM, 7 - 159 Department number, 7 - 141 Code 128, 7 - 26 Assign Code 128, 7 - 31 Operating procedure for structure creation, 7 - 28 Structure example, 7 - 27, 7 - 29 Designation label, 2 - 2 Commissioning, 4 - 8, 7 - 137 Memory management, 7 - 142 Number of items (ticket memory), 7 - 145 Number of supplementary texts, 7 - 144 Set DHCP, 7 - 138 Set number of PLUs, 7 - 144 Set TCP-IP, 7 - 137 start, 7 - 147 Conditions for the place of installation, 4 - 1 Configuration, 7 - 84 Constant, 6 - 14, 7 - 94 Continuous operation, 7 - 39 Multicast IP address, 7 - 149 Multicast port number, 7 - 149 Overview, 7 - 39 Scale type, 7 - 148 UDP port number, 7 - 149 11 - 2 Device types, 2 - 1 Direct keys, 7 - 104 Display, 5 - 2 Control lighting, 7 - 150 Icons, 5 - 2 Display ADC program version, 7 - 167 Display battery voltage, 7 - 169 Display program version, 7 - 168 Display test, 7 - 170 Display the load cell type, 7 - 167 E EAN 13, 7 - 20 Allocate EAN 13, 7 - 23 Example of structure definition, 7 - 22 Structure example, 7 - 21 EAN 8, 7 - 25 Structure example, 7 - 25 End of label, 5 - 12 End of ticket paper, 5 - 11 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Environmental conditions, 10 - 2 Explanation of symbols, 1 - 2 F Fixed weight Back-calculation, 7 - 50 Create, 7 - 35 Overview, 7 - 35 Fixed weight , Database configuration, 7 - 33 Font Change on label, 7 - 127 change on ticket, 7 - 115 Font type, change, 7 - 10 Footer text create, 7 - 56 delete, 7 - 59 Print list, 7 - 58 print on ticket, 7 - 113 Foreign currency Calculation method, 7 - 134 Currency exchange rate, 7 - 135 Currency factor, 7 - 135 Currency symbol, 7 - 134 Decimal places, 7 - 134 print on label, 7 - 128 Print supplementary text on ticket, 7 - 114 Rounding, 7 - 135 Second currency display, 7 - 133 Select function, 7 - 133 Settings, 7 - 133 Translation rule, 7 - 136 G General operating mode settings, 7 - 90 Guidelines, 2 - 4 Subject index Print list, 7 - 58 print on label, 7 - 124 print on ticket, 7 - 113 I Initial display, 7 - 1 Initial setting, 7 - 4 Input Special characters, 7 - 12 Text, 7 - 10, 7 - 11 Insert ticket roll , 5 - 11 Install label roll, 5 - 12 Installation, 4 - 1 Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 20 Instore code EAN 8, 7 - 25 IP address Display, 7 - 138, 7 - 140 set, 7 - 138 11 Items operator display, 7 - 96 J Journal, delete, 7 - 83 Journal function, 7 - 146 K Key functions, 5 - 4 Keyboard, 5 - 3, 5 - 4 Functions, 5 - 4 Keyboard, 5 - 4 Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3 Keyboard selection, 7 - 158 Keys Function code table, 7 - 157 Modify function, 7 - 156 Konformitätserklärung, 3, 5 H Header and footer text list, 7 - 5 Header text create, 7 - 56 delete, 7 - 59 6.111.98.5.01.18 L Label, 5 - 12 Barcode printout, 7 - 123 Change font, 7 - 127 11 - 3 Subject index 11 Data field monitoring, 7 - 126 Delete configuration, 7 - 132 Label distance, 7 - 122 Label height, 7 - 122 Print article label, 7 - 95 Print speed, 7 - 130 Print total label, 7 - 95 Release printing of: Alternative text sell-by date, 7 - 124 Barcode, 7 - 123 Check digit, 7 - 127 Foreign currency, 7 - 128 Header text, 7 - 124 Logo, 7 - 124 Machine ID, 7 - 127 Operator No., 7 - 127 Packed-on and sell-by date, 7 - 122 Price range and texts, 7 - 127 Tare, 7 - 123 Saving the configuration, 7 - 131 Select configuration, 7 - 132 Set barcode height, 7 - 123 Set beginning of data field, 7 - 125 Set beginning of text field, 7 - 125 Set feed, 7 - 165 Operating instruction BC II Header and footer text list, 7 - 5, 7 - 58 Logo list, 7 - 8 Menu settings, 7 - 163 PLU (articles), 7 - 5 PLU article list, 7 - 53 PLU direct keys, 7 - 6, 7 - 107 Supplementary text list, 7 - 6, 7 - 58 Weighing system information, 7 - 164 Logbook monitoring, 7 - 171 Logo BLD, 7 - 49 delete, 7 - 71 Print list, 7 - 71 M Machine ID print on label, 7 - 127 set, 7 - 142 Main operating mode, 7 - 4, 7 - 87 select, 7 - 87 Mains supply, 3 - 2, 4 - 3 Label design, Overview, 7 - 118 Maintenance, 9 - 1, 9 - 6 Label type, 7 - 121 Manual input, 6 - 10 Labeling mode, 7 - 101 Manufacturer code EAN 8, 7 - 19 Labels Configuration, 7 - 120 Delete BLD labels, 7 - 72 Move print format, 7 - 165 Multi- printing, 6 - 8, 6 - 9 Multiple printing, 7 - 102 Price labeling mode, 6 - 7 Price labeling mode , 6 - 6 Print BLD label list, 7 - 71 Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 Rotated layout, 7 - 128 Self-service mode, 6 - 3 Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 18 Leveling of scale, 4 - 2 Lists Barcode structures, 7 - 7, 7 - 65 BLD label list, 7 - 7 Communication settings, 7 - 140 Delete header and footer text list, 7 - 59 Delete supplementary text list, 7 - 59 11 - 4 Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3 Memory management, 7 - 142 Menu call-up, 7 - 2 Menu password, 7 - 1, 7 - 159 Minus amount, 6 - 11 Multiple operator mode, 7 - 94 Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2 Multiplication Minus amount, 6 - 11 PLU price per piece, 6 - 17 Price per piece manual input, 6 - 10 N Negative customer total, 7 - 91 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Network Display IP address, 7 - 140 Settings, 7 - 137 Non-PLU, Settings, 7 - 67 Numerical codes , 7 - 62 O Operating conditions, 2 - 5 Operating options Labels multi-printing/fixed weight, 6 - 9 Multi- printing of labels, 6 - 8 Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2 Overview, 6 - 2 Price labeling mode, 6 - 6, 6 - 7 Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 Self-service mode, 6 - 3 Operational safety, 3 - 2 Operator Keys, 7 - 103 Number, 7 - 127 Report, 7 - 80 Operator report, 7 - 80 Operator tare, 6 - 23 call up value saved, 6 - 24 save value entered, 6 - 23 save weighed value, 6 - 23 Origin labeling, 7 - 91 Define data of origin number, 7 - 91 PLU data of origin, 7 - 47 Overview of list, 7 - 5 Overwrite unit price, 6 - 17 P Packed-on date Alternative text, 7 - 130 print on label, 7 - 122 Paper , Label printer, 5 - 13 Paper end detection, 7 - 166 Paper feed, Label printer in BC II 800, Ticket paper, 5 - 11 Paper type, 7 - 88, 7 - 90 Password, 7 - 1, 7 - 159 6.111.98.5.01.18 Subject index Payment in/out, 6 - 45 Place of installation, 4 - 1 PLU, 5 - 5 -Overwrite unit price, 6 - 17 Assign barcode, 7 - 45 Assign product group, 7 - 44 Assign supplementary text, 7 - 48 call, 6 - 15 define, 7 - 43 Define PLU tare, 7 - 44 delete, 7 - 54 Direct key allocation, 7 - 104 Direct key mode, 7 - 104 Enter number of digits, 7 - 104 Enter sell-by date, 7 - 45 Input mode, 7 - 103 Input with 10-key keypad, 6 - 16 Number of BLD logo fields per PLU, 7 - 144 Number of BLD text fields per PLU, 7 - 144 Number of digits for input, 7 - 104 Number of supplementary texts per PLU, 7 - 144 Overwrite unit price, 7 - 46 PLU text, 7 - 47 Print direct keys, 7 - 107 Print direct keys list, 7 - 6 Print list, 7 - 53 Range limitation, 7 - 105 registration, 6 - 17 Report, 7 - 78 Set number, 7 - 144 Tare , 6 - 22 Weight class, 7 - 47 PLU Configuration, 7 - 104 Define unit price, 7 - 44 PLU list, 7 - 5 PLU number, for Non-PLU, 7 - 70 Power supply, 10 - 2 Price calculation, 7 - 108 Price labeling mode, 6 - 6, 6 - 7, 7 - 101 Price overwrite, 6 - 17, 7 - 46 Price per piece manual input, 6 - 10 11 - 5 11 Subject index Print boot log information, 7 - 162 Print communication settings, 7 - 140 Print direct keys list, 7 - 6 Print fonts, 7 - 163 Print logbook, 7 - 173 Print menu settings, 7 - 163 Weighing system information, 7 - 164 Print speed, 7 - 130 Print supplement. text list, 7 - 6 Print weighing system information, 7 - 164 11 Printer, 5 - 8 Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 , 5-9 Printer lid BC II 100/200 , 5 - 8 Side cover BC II 100/ 200, 5 - 8 test, 7 - 161 Thermal print head, 5 - 10 Operating instruction BC II Operator, 7 - 80 PLU products, 7 - 78 Product groups, 7 - 79 Sales by data of origin, 7 - 81 Scales, 7 - 77 VAT report, 7 - 82 Reverification, 2 - 3 Rounding, 7 - 108 By count, 7 - 110 Foreign currency, 7 - 135 Supplementary text, 7 - 114 S Safety instructions, 3 - 1 Sales delete, 7 - 83 display, 7 - 83 print on label, 7 - 82 Sales calculation, 7 - 92 Printer settings, 7 - 165 Change print intensity , 7 - 166 Sales calculation, Release addition, 7 - 92 Printing head, open/close, 5 - 10 Product groups, for PLU, 7 - 44 Scale Payment in/out, 6 - 45 Sensitivity, 7 - 155 Turn-of f time, 7 - 151 with cash drawer, 6 - 45 Product with data of origin, 6 - 46 Scale number, 7 - 140 Programming overview, 7 - 174 Scale switch-off time, 7 - 151 Product group, for non-PLU, 7 - 69 Product group report, 7 - 79 Q Quick service mode, 7 - 100 Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 R RAM, use, 7 - 146 Range limitation, 7 - 105 Receipt, Correct feed, 7 - 166 Rechargeable battery, 4 - 6 Icons, 4 - 7 Reports, 7 - 75 Customer name for reports, 7 - 76 on label, 7 - 82 on ticket, 7 - 77 11 - 6 Scales network, Continuous operation, 7 - 39 Scales reports, 7 - 77 Scroll function, 6 - 13 Scrolling message activate, 7 - 93 Define text, 7 - 57 Delete text, 7 - 60 select, 7 - 93 Select display location, 7 - 93 Settings, 7 - 93 test, 7 - 94 Scrolling messages activating, 7 - 15 Define text, 7 - 15 print, 7 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Second currency, 7 - 160 Change main currency, 7 - 160 Convert PLU price, 7 - 160 Select layout Label layout, 7 - 87, 7 - 89 Ticket layout, 7 - 87, 7 - 89 Self-service mode, 6 - 3 Sell-by date, 7 - 45 Alternative text on label, 7 - 124 for non-PLU, 7 - 67 Print on label, 7 - 122 Print texts, 7 - 127 Subject index Special characters, 7 - 12 Standards, 2 - 4 Subtotal, 6 - 14 Supplementary text for BLD text fields, 7 - 48 for PLU, 7 - 48 Supplementary texts create, 7 - 55 delete, 7 - 59 print, 7 - 58 Supply voltage , 3 - 2, 4 - 3 Sensitivity, of the scale, 7 - 155 Switch off, 6 - 1 Service menu, 7 - 161 Switch on, 6 - 1 Set width of paper , 5 - 13 Switching operating mode, 7 - 89 select, 7 - 89 Settings Date, 7 - 85 Date representation, 7 - 86 Department number, 7 - 141 different operating modes, 7 - 87 Display lighting, 7 - 150 DNS1, DNS2, 7 - 139 Euro, 7 - 160 for different operating modes, 7 - 90 Foreign currency, 7 - 133 Gateway, 7 - 138 Host name, 7 - 139 IP address, 7 - 138 Machine ID, 7 - 142 Main operating mode, 7 - 87 Multiple operator mode, 7 - 94 Network, 7 - 137 Non-PLU, 7 - 67 Price calculation, 7 - 108 Price labeling mode, 7 - 101 Print menu settings, 7 - 163 Printer, 7 - 165 Quick service mode, 7 - 100 Quick-service mode, 7 - 100 Scale number, 7 - 140 Scrolling message, 7 - 93 Sensitivity, 7 - 155 Subnet mask, 7 - 138 Switching operating mode, 7 - 89 TCP-IP , 7 - 137 Time, 7 - 85 Year with 2, 4 digits, 7 - 85 Side cover , 5 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.18 Switching operation mode, 7 - 4 System Continuous operation, 7 - 39 Identification on system, 7 - 40 Installation, 4 - 5 Multicast IP address, 7 - 149 Multicast port number, 7 - 149 Scale type, 7 - 148 System conditions, 7 - 40 System set-up, 7 - 40 Take device out of the system, 7 - 41 UDP port number, 7 - 149 T Talon, 6 - 26, 7 - 97 Tare Fixed value memory, 7 - 108 PLU tare, 7 - 44 print on label, 7 - 123 print on ticket, 7 - 113 Tare %, 7 - 52 Tare Batch tare, 6 - 20 clear, 6 - 22 Manual tare, 6 - 21 Operator tare, 6 - 23, 6 - 24 unknown tare, 6 - 19 Tare functions, 6 - 19 PLU tare, 6 - 22 11 - 7 11 Subject index Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4, 6 - 22 Test printing, 7 - 161 Text Alternative text for packed-on date, 7 - 130 Alternative text for use-by date, 7 - 130 Article supplement. text, 7 - 48 Create header and footer text, 7 - 56 delete, 7 - 59 Function keys, 7 - 14 Input, 7 - 10 Input PLU text, 7 - 47 print Header and footer text, 7 - 5, 7 - 58 Supplementary texts, 7 - 6 Print out overview, 7 - 58 Scrolling message, 7 - 57 Supplementary text, 7 - 55 11 Thermal bar, Cleaning, 9 - 2 Thermal paper storage, 9 - 6 Thermal strip, close, 5 - 10 Ticket Assisted sales, 6 - 25 Change font, 7 - 115 Configuration, 7 - 112 Number of article text lines, 7 - 115 Open ticket again, 6 - 27, 6 - 28, 7 - 98 open tickets, 7 - 91 print upon request, 6 - 26 Printing foreign currency, 7 - 116 Printout cancellation, 7 - 99 Printout of VAT incl., 7 - 99 Printout, as required, 7 - 99 Release printing of: Amount paid in/out, 7 - 116 Barcode, 7 - 112 footer text, 7 - 113 Foreign currency supplementary text, 7 - 114 Header text, 7 - 113 Rounding suppl. text, 7 - 114 Supplementary article text, 7 - 116 Tare, 7 - 113 Repeat ticket, 6 - 27, 7 - 98 Set barcode height, 7 - 112 Ticket counter, 7 - 115 11 - 8 Operating instruction BC II Ticket design, Overview, 7 - 111 Ticket journal, Call-up data volume, 7 - 136 Time, set, 7 - 85 Total, 6 - 14 Rounding of article total, 7 - 109 Rounding of customer total, 7 - 109 Total label, 7 - 88 Total sales report, 7 - 82 delete, 7 - 83 display, 7 - 83 Traceability data, 6 - 46 Traceability marker, 7 - 32 Manual input, 7 - 32 U Unit price input, 6 - 10 via 10-key keypad, 6 - 10 Use-by date, Alternative text, 7 - 130 V VAT administer, 7 - 72 Allocate to PLU, 7 - 51 Define VAT rate, 7 - 73 For all articles, 7 - 74 for non-PLU minus, 7 - 70 for non-PLU non-weighed, 7 - 70 for non-PLU weighed, 7 - 70 inclusive or exclusive, 7 - 73 List, 7 - 9 manage, 7 - 74 Overview, 7 - 37 overwriteable, 7 - 51 Print list, 7 - 74 Text , 7 - 73 Verbund, Installation, 4 - 5 Verification information, 2 - 3 W Waagenverbund, Installation, 4 - 5 Weight class, 7 - 47 6.111.98.5.01.18 Operating instruction BC II Weight input, Manual, 6 - 18 WLAN Functional diagnosis, 7 - 154 on/off, 7 - 151 Settings, 7 - 152, 7 - 153 Switch on, 7 - 152 Subject index Z Zero setting, 7 - 90 Zerosetting, 6 - 1 Y Year , 2 or 4-digit, 7 - 85 11 6.111.98.5.01.18 11 - 9 Operating instruction BC II Appendix Declaration of Conformity for BC ll Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN SparkLAN WUBR-507N 6.111.98.5.01.18 Appendix Appendix Operating instruction BC II 6.111.98.5.01.18 Hauptverwaltung Balingen Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen Wilhelm-Kraut-Straße 65 72336 Balingen, Germany Declaration of type conformity We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described below Definition: retail scale Type: BC II . . . (100, 200, 800) No. of EC type approval certificate: D07-09-014 No. of notified body for EC type approval certificate: 0102 (PTB) complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current requirements of the following EC directives: Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments 2009/23/EC EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC Directive on electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 2006/95/EC Applied national technical standards and specifications: Metrology: DIN EN 45501: 1992 (OIML R76-1, 2006) EMC: DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 55022/2011-12 DIN EN 61000-3-2/2010-03; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06 Safety: DIN EN 60950-1 This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type conformity of a notified body. This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba. The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid. Date: September 27th, 2012 Signature of manufacturer: ppa. Title: Andreas W. Kraut Chairman of the Executive Board Chief Executive Officer (CEO) & Shareholder Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG 6.111.98.5.01.18 Hauptverwaltung Balingen Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen Wilhelm-Kraut-Straße 65 72336 Balingen, Germany Declaration of type conformity We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described below Definition: retail scale Type: BC II . . . (100, 200, 800) with WLAN No. of EC type approval certificate: D07-09-014 No. of notified body for EC type approval certificate: 0102 (PTB) complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current requirements of the following EC directives: Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments 2009/23/EC EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC Directive on electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits 2006/95/EC Applied national technical standards and specifications: Metrology: DIN EN 45501: 1992 (OIML R76-1, 2006) EMC: DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 55022/2011-12 DIN EN 61000-3-2/2010-03; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06 Safety: DIN EN 60950-1 WLAN: See data in declaration of conformity of manufacturer. This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type conformity of a notified body. This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba. The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid. Date: September 27th, 2012 Signature of manufacturer: ppa. Title: Andreas W. Kraut Chairman of the Executive Board Chief Executive Officer (CEO) & Shareholder Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG 6.111.98.5.01.18 SparkLAN WUBR-507N 6.111.98.5.01.18 SparkLAN WUBR-507N 6.111.98.5.01.18 SparkLAN WUBR-507N 6.111.98.5.01.18 SparkLAN WUBR-507N 6.111.98.5.01.18 SparkLAN WUBR-507N 6.111.98.5.01.18